summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
-rw-r--r--.gitattributes4
-rw-r--r--LICENSE.txt11
-rw-r--r--README.md2
-rw-r--r--old/68732-0.txt3061
-rw-r--r--old/68732-0.zipbin58757 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/68732-h.zipbin2499583 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/68732-h/68732-h.htm4118
-rw-r--r--old/68732-h/images/cover.jpgbin605797 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/68732-h/images/coversmall.jpgbin249491 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/68732-h/images/i_002.jpgbin124288 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/68732-h/images/i_007.jpgbin22999 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/68732-h/images/i_012b.jpgbin127390 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/68732-h/images/i_017.jpgbin26345 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/68732-h/images/i_026b.jpgbin124262 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/68732-h/images/i_027.jpgbin25417 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/68732-h/images/i_037.jpgbin24171 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/68732-h/images/i_042b.jpgbin131643 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/68732-h/images/i_047.jpgbin17311 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/68732-h/images/i_052b.jpgbin103048 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/68732-h/images/i_058a.jpgbin133852 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/68732-h/images/i_064a.jpgbin134964 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/68732-h/images/i_072a.jpgbin124540 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/68732-h/images/i_080b.jpgbin111929 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/68732-h/images/i_092b.jpgbin128329 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/68732-h/images/i_099.jpgbin22863 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/68732-h/images/i_104a.jpgbin128905 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/68732-h/images/i_112a.jpgbin128702 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/68732-h/images/i_124a.jpgbin130777 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/68732-h/images/i_130a.jpgbin115683 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/68732-h/images/i_142b.jpgbin107702 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/68732-h/images/i_titlepage.jpgbin30839 -> 0 bytes
31 files changed, 17 insertions, 7179 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d7b82bc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/.gitattributes
@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
+*.txt text eol=lf
+*.htm text eol=lf
+*.html text eol=lf
+*.md text eol=lf
diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6312041
--- /dev/null
+++ b/LICENSE.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements,
+metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be
+in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES.
+
+Procedures for determining public domain status are described in
+the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org.
+
+No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in
+jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize
+this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright
+status under the laws that apply to them.
diff --git a/README.md b/README.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5ad380a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/README.md
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for
+eBook #68732 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/68732)
diff --git a/old/68732-0.txt b/old/68732-0.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 71c46e1..0000000
--- a/old/68732-0.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,3061 +0,0 @@
-The Project Gutenberg eBook of The moral pirates, by W. L. Alden
-
-This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and
-most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions
-whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms
-of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at
-www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you
-will have to check the laws of the country where you are located before
-using this eBook.
-
-Title: The moral pirates
-
-Author: W. L. Alden
-
-Illustrator: A. B. Frost
-
-Release Date: August 12, 2022 [eBook #68732]
-
-Language: English
-
-Produced by: Richard Hulse, David E. Brown, and the Online Distributed
- Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net (This file was
- produced from images generously made available by The
- Internet Archive/American Libraries.)
-
-*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE MORAL PIRATES ***
-
-
-[Illustration: THE TIDE AGAINST THEM. [_Page 23._]
-
-
-
-
- THE MORAL PIRATES
-
- BY
- W. L. ALDEN
-
-
- _ILLUSTRATED_
-
-
- NEW YORK
- HARPER & BROTHERS, FRANKLIN SQUARE
- 1881
-
-
-
-
- Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1880, by
- HARPER & BROTHERS,
- In the Office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington.
-
- _All rights reserved._
-
-
-
-
-ILLUSTRATIONS.
-
-
- THE TIDE AGAINST THEM _Frontispiece_
-
- THE “WHITEWING” AT HARLEM _faces page_ 13
-
- HARRY SWIMS FOR THE EDDY “ “ 27
-
- “IF YOU WANT TO DIG, DIG. I DON’T INTEND TO DO ANY
- MORE DIGGING” “ “ 43
-
- THE SOUP EXPLOSION “ “ 53
-
- THE BOYS BUILT A ROARING FIRE ON A LARGE FLAT ROCK “ “ 58
-
- JOE IS CAUGHT “ “ 64
-
- MUMBLE-THE-PEG “ “ 72
-
- LIFTING THE BOAT OVER THE PILES “ “ 81
-
- GOING THROUGH THE LOCK “ “ 93
-
- THE FIGHT WITH THE TRAMPS “ “ 104
-
- HARRY AND JOE IN A TRAP “ “ 112
-
- HARRY SETS OUT IN PURSUIT OF THE BOAT “ “ 124
-
- BIDDING JIM GOOD-BYE “ “ 130
-
- THE EXPLOSION IN CAMP “ “ 143
-
-
-
-
-THE MORAL PIRATES.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER I.
-
-
-“The truth is, John,” said Mr. Wilson to his brother, “I am troubled
-about my boy. Here it is the first of July, and he can’t go back to
-school until the middle of September. He will be idle all that time,
-and I’m afraid he’ll get into mischief. Now, the other day I found him
-reading a wretched story about pirates. Why should a son of mine care
-to read about pirates?”
-
-“Because he’s a boy. All boys like piratical stories. I know, when
-I was a boy, I thought that if I could be either a pirate or a
-stage-driver I should be perfectly happy. Of course you don’t want
-Harry to read rubbish; but it doesn’t follow because a boy reads
-stories about piracy, that he wants to commit murder and robbery. I
-didn’t want to kill anybody: I wanted to be a moral and benevolent
-pirate. But here comes Harry across the lawn. What will you give me
-if I will find something for him to do this summer that will make him
-forget all about piracy?”
-
-“I only wish you would. Tell me what your plan is.”
-
-“Come here a minute, Harry,” said Uncle John. “Now own up; do you like
-books about pirates?”
-
-“Well, yes, uncle, I do.”
-
-“So did I when I was your age. I thought it would be the best fun in
-the world to be a Red Revenger of the Seas.”
-
-“Wouldn’t it, though!” exclaimed Harry. “I don’t mean it would be fun
-to kill people, and to steal watches, but to have a schooner of your
-own, and go cruising everywhere, and have storms and--and--hurricanes,
-you know.”
-
-“Why shouldn’t you do it this summer?” asked Uncle John. “If you want
-to cruise in a craft of your own, you shall do it; that is, if your
-father doesn’t object. A schooner would be a little too big for a
-boy of thirteen; but you and two or three other fellows might make a
-splendid cruise in a row-boat. You could have a mast and sail, and
-you could take provisions and things, and cruise from Harlem all the
-way up into the lakes in the Northern woods. It would be all the same
-as piracy, except that you would not be committing crimes, and making
-innocent people wretched.”
-
-“Uncle John, it would be just gorgeous! We’d have a gun and a lot of
-fishing-lines, and we could live on fish and bears. There’s bears in
-the woods, you know.”
-
-“You won’t find many bears, I’m afraid; but you would have to take a
-gun, and you might possibly find a wild-cat or two. Who is there that
-would go with you?”
-
-“Oh, there’s Tom Schuyler, and Joe and Jim Sharpe; and there’s Sam
-M‘Grath--though he’d be quarrelling all the time. Maybe Charley Smith’s
-father would let him go. He is a first-rate fellow. You’d ought to see
-him play base-ball once!”
-
-“Three boys besides yourself would be enough. If you have too many,
-there will be too much risk of quarrelling. There is one thing you must
-be sure of--no boy must go who can’t swim.”
-
-“Oh, all the fellows can swim, except Bill Town. He was pretty near
-drowned last summer. He’d been bragging about what a stunning swimmer
-he was, and the boys believed him; so one day one of the fellows shoved
-him off the float, where we go in swimming at our school, and he
-thought he was dead for sure. The water was only up to his neck, but he
-couldn’t swim a stroke.”
-
-“Well, if you can get three good fellows to go with you--boys that you
-know are not blackguards, but are the kind of boys that your father
-would be willing to have you associate with--I’ll give you a boat and a
-tent, and you shall have a better cruise than any pirate ever had; for
-no real pirate ever found any fun in being a thief and a murderer. You
-go and see Tom and the Sharpe boys, and tell them about it. I’ll see
-about the boat as soon as you have shipped your crew.”
-
-“You are quite sure that your plan is a good one?” asked Mr. Wilson,
-as the boy vanished, with sparkling eyes, to search for his comrades.
-“Isn’t it very risky to let the boys go off by themselves in a boat?
-Won’t they get drowned?”
-
-“There is always more or less danger in boating,” replied Uncle
-John; “but the boys can swim; and they cannot learn prudence and
-self-reliance without running some risks. Yes, it is a good plan, I am
-sure. It will give them plenty of exercise in the open air, and will
-teach them to like manly, honest sports. You see that the reason Harry
-likes piratical stories is his natural love of adventure. I venture to
-predict that if their cruise turns out well, those four boys will think
-stories of pirates are stupid as well as silly.”
-
-So the matter was decided. Harry found that Tom Schuyler and the Sharpe
-boys were delighted with the plan, and Uncle John soon obtained the
-consent of Mr. Schuyler and Mr. Sharpe. The boys immediately began to
-make preparations for the cruise; and Uncle John bought a row-boat, and
-employed a boat-builder to make such alterations as were necessary to
-fit his for service.
-
-The boat was what is called a Whitehall row-boat. She was seventeen
-feet long, and rowed very easily, and she carried a small mast with
-a spritsail. By Uncle John’s orders an air-tight box, made of tin,
-was fitted into each end of the boat, so that, even if she were to
-be filled with water, the air in the tin boxes would float her.
-She was painted white outside, with a narrow blue streak, and dark
-brown inside. Harry named her the _Whitewing_; and his mother made a
-beautiful silk signal for her, which was to be carried at the sprit
-when under sail, and on a small staff at the bow of the boat at other
-times. For oars there were two pairs of light seven-foot sculls, and
-a pair of ten-foot oars, each of which was to be pulled by a single
-boy. The rudder was fitted with a yoke and a pair of lines, and the
-sail was of new and very light canvas. On one side of the boat was a
-little locker, made to hold a gun; and on the other side were places
-for fishing-rods and fishing-tackle. When she was brought around to
-Harlem, and Harry saw her for the first time, he was so overjoyed that
-he turned two or three hand-springs, bringing up during the last one
-against a post--an exploit which nearly broke his shin, and induced
-his uncle to remark that he would never rise to distinction as a Moral
-Pirate unless he could give up turning hand-springs while on duty.
-
-[Illustration: THE “WHITEWING” AT HARLEM.]
-
-Harry could row very fairly, for he belonged to a boat-club at school.
-It was not very much of a club; but then the club-boat was not very
-much of a boat, being a small, flat-bottomed skiff, which leaked so
-badly that she could not be kept afloat unless one boy kept constantly
-at work bailing. However, Harry learned to row in her, and he now
-found this knowledge very useful. He was anxious to start on the
-cruise immediately, but his uncle insisted that the crew must first be
-trained. “I must teach you to sail, and you must teach your crew to
-row,” said Uncle John. “The Department will never consent to let a boat
-go on a cruise unless her commander and her crew know their duty.”
-
-“What’s the Department?” asked Harry.
-
-“The Navy Department in the United States service has the whole charge
-of the Navy, and sends vessels where it pleases. Now, I consider that
-I represent a Department of Moral Piracy, and I therefore superintend
-the fitting out of the _Whitewing_. You can’t expect moral piracy to
-flourish unless you respect the Department, and obey its orders.”
-
-“All right, uncle,” replied Harry. “Of course the Department furnishes
-stores and everything else for a cruise, doesn’t it?”
-
-“I suppose it must,” said his uncle, laughing. “I didn’t think of that
-when I proposed to become a department.”
-
-The boys met every day at Harlem and practised rowing. Uncle John
-taught them how to sail the boat, by letting them take her out under
-sail when there was very little breeze, while he kept close along-side
-in another boat very much like the _Whitewing_. Harry sat in the
-stern-sheets, holding the yoke-lines. Tom Schuyler, who was fourteen
-years old, and a boy of more than usual prudence, sat on the nearest
-thwart and held the sheet, which passed under a cleat without being
-made fast to it, in his hand. Next came Jim Sharpe, whose business it
-was to unship the mast when the captain should order sail to be taken
-in; and on the forward thwart sat Joe Sharpe, who was not quite twelve,
-and who kept the boat-hook within reach, so as to use it on coming
-to shore. The boys kept the same positions when rowing, Tom Schuyler
-being the stroke. Uncle John told them that if every one always had the
-same seat, and had a particular duty assigned to him, it would prevent
-confusion and dispute, and greatly increase the safety of the vessel
-and crew.
-
-It was not long before Harry could sail the boat nicely, and the
-others, by attending closely to Uncle John’s lessons, learned almost as
-much as their young captain. So far as boat-sailing can be taught in
-fair weather, Harry was carefully and thoroughly taught in six or seven
-lessons, and could handle the _Whitewing_ beautifully; but the ability
-to judge of the weather, to tell when it is going to blow, and how
-the wind will probably shift, can of course be learned only by actual
-experience.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER II.
-
-
-When Uncle John announced that the Department was satisfied with
-the ability of the captain and crew to manage the _Whitewing_, the
-day for sailing was fixed, and the boys laid in their stores. Each
-one had a fishing-line and hooks, and Harry and Tom each took a
-fishing-pole--two poles being as many as were needed, since most of the
-fishing would probably be done with drop-lines. Uncle John lent Harry
-his double-barrelled gun, and a supply of ammunition. Each boy took a
-tin plate, a tin cup, knife, fork, and spoon. For cooking purposes,
-the boat carried a coffee-pot, two tin cake-pans, which could be used
-as frying-pans as well as for other purposes, and two small tin pails.
-Harry’s mother lent him several large round tin boxes, in which were
-stored four pounds of coffee, two pounds of sugar, a pound of Indian
-meal, a large quantity of crackers, some salt, and a little pepper.
-The rest of the provisions consisted of two cans of soup, two cans of
-corned-beef, a can of roast-beef, two small cans of devilled chicken,
-four cans of fresh peaches, a little package of condensed beef for
-making beef-tea, and a cold boiled ham. The boat was furnished with an
-=A= tent, four rubber blankets and four woollen blankets, a hatchet,
-a quantity of spare cordage, a little bull’s-eye lantern, which burnt
-olive-oil, a few copper nails, a pair of pliers, and a small piece of
-zinc and a little white-lead for mending a leak. Of course there was a
-bottle of oil for the lantern; and Mrs. Schuyler added a little box of
-pills and a bottle of “Hamlin’s Mixture” as medical stores. The boys
-wore blue flannel trousers and shirts, and each one carried an extra
-pair of trousers, and an extra shirt instead of a coat. These, with a
-few pairs of stockings and two or three handkerchiefs, were all the
-clothing that they needed, so Uncle John said; though the boys had
-imagined that they must take at least two complete suits. He showed
-them that two flannel shirts worn at the same time, one over the other,
-would be as warm as one shirt and a coat, and that if their clothing
-became wet, it could be easily dried. “Flannel and the compass are the
-two things that are indispensable to navigation,” said Uncle John: “if
-flannel shirts had not been invented, Columbus would never have crossed
-the Atlantic.” Perhaps there was a little exaggeration in this; but
-when we remember that flannel is the only material that is warm in cold
-weather and cool in hot weather, and that dries almost as soon as it
-is wrung out and hung in the wind, it is difficult to see how sailors
-could do without it.
-
-The boys agreed very readily to take with them only what Uncle John
-advised. Tom Schuyler, however, was very anxious to take a heavy iron
-vise, which he said could be screwed on the gunwale of the boat, and
-might prove to be very useful, although he could not say precisely
-what he expected to use it for. Joe Sharpe also wanted to take a
-base-ball and bat, but neither the vise nor the ball and bat were taken.
-
-The _Whitewing_ started from the foot of East 127th Street, on a
-Monday morning in the middle of July, at about nine o’clock. Quite a
-small crowd of friends were present to see the boys off, and the neat
-appearance of the boat and her crew attracted the attention of all the
-idlers along the shore. When all the cargo was stowed, and everything
-was ready, Uncle John called the boys aside, and said, “Now, boys, you
-must sign the articles.”
-
-“What are articles?” asked all the boys at once.
-
-“They are certain regulations, which every respectable pirate, or any
-other sailor for that matter, must agree to keep when he joins a ship.
-I’ll read the articles, and if any of you don’t like any one of them
-say so frankly, for you must not begin a cruise in a dissatisfied state
-of mind. Here are the articles:
-
-“‘I. _We, the captain and crew of the_ Whitewing, _promise to decide
-all disputed questions by the vote of the majority, except questions
-concerning the management of the boat. The orders of the captain,
-in all matters connected with the management of the boat, shall be
-promptly obeyed by the crew._’
-
-“Now, if anybody thinks that the captain should not have the full
-control of the boat, let him say so at once. Very likely the captain
-will make mistakes; but the boat will be safer, even if the crew obeys
-a wrong order, than it would be if every order should be debated by the
-crew. You can’t hold town-meetings when you are afloat. Harry, I think,
-understands pretty well how to sail the boat. Will you agree to obey
-his orders?”
-
-All the boys said they would; and Joe Sharpe added that he thought the
-captain ought to have the right to put mutineers in irons.
-
-“That, let us hope, will not be necessary,” said Uncle John. “Now
-listen to the second article:
-
-“‘II. _We promise not to take corn, apples, or other property without
-permission of the owner._’
-
-“You will very likely camp near some field where corn, or potatoes,
-or something eatable, is growing. Many people think there is no harm
-in taking a few ears of corn or a half-dozen apples. I want you to
-remember that to take anything that is not your own, unless you have
-permission to do so, is stealing. It’s an ugly word, but it can’t be
-smoothed over in any way. Do you object to this article?”
-
-Nobody objected to it. “We’re moral pirates, Uncle John,” said Tom
-Schuyler, “and we won’t disgrace the Department by stealing.”
-
-“I know you would not, except through thoughtlessness. Now these are
-all the articles. I did think of asking you not to quarrel or to use
-bad language, but I don’t believe it is necessary to ask you to make
-such a promise, and if it were, you probably would not keep it. So,
-sign the articles, give them to the captain, and take your stations.”
-
-The articles were signed. The captain seated himself in the
-stern-sheets, and took the yoke-lines. The rest took their proper
-places, and Joe Sharpe held the boat to the dock by the boat-hook.
-“Are you all ready?” cried Uncle John. “All ready, sir!” answered
-Harry. “Then give way with your oars! Good-bye, boys, and don’t forget
-to send reports to the Department.”
-
-The boat glided away from the shore with Tom and Jim each pulling a
-pair of sculls. The group on the dock gave the boys a farewell cheer,
-and in a few moments they were hid from sight by the Third Avenue
-bridge. The tide was against them, but the day was a cool one for the
-season, and the boys rowed steadily on in the very best of spirits.
-There was a light south wind, but, as there were several bridges to
-pass, Harry thought it best not to set the sail before reaching the
-Hudson River. It required careful steering to avoid the steamboats,
-bridge-piles, and small boats; but the _Whitewing_ was guided safely,
-and her signal--a red flag with a white cross--floated gayly at the bow.
-
-Uncle John had made one serious mistake: he had forgotten all about
-the tide, and never thought of the difficulty the boys would find
-in passing Farmersbridge with the tide against them. They had passed
-High Bridge, and had entered a part of the river with which the boys
-were not familiar, when Joe Sharpe suddenly called out, “There’s a low
-bridge right ahead that we can’t pass.” A few more strokes of the oars
-enabled Harry to see a long low bridge, which completely blocked up the
-river except at one place, that seemed not much wider than the boat.
-Through this narrow channel the tide was rushing fiercely, the water
-heaping itself up in waves that looked unpleasantly high and rough. The
-boat was rowed as close as possible to the opening under the bridge;
-but the current was so strong that the boys could not row against it,
-and even if they had been able to stem it, the channel was too narrow
-to permit them to use the oars.
-
-Harry ordered the boat to be rowed up to the bridge at a place where
-there was a quiet eddy, and all the crew went ashore to contrive some
-way of overcoming the difficulty. Presently Harry thought of a plan.
-“If we could get the painter under the bridge, we could pull the boat
-through easy enough if there was nobody in her.”
-
-“That’s all very well,” said Joe, “but how are you going to get the
-painter through?”
-
-“I know,” cried Jim. “Let’s take a long piece of rope and drop it in
-the water the other side of the bridge. The current will float it
-through, and we can catch it and tie it to the painter.”
-
-The plan seemed a good one; and so the boys took a piece of spare
-rope from the boat, tied a bit of board to one end of it for a float,
-dropped the float into the water, and held on to the other end of the
-rope. When the float came in sight below the bridge they caught it with
-the boat-hook, and, throwing away the piece of board, tied the rope to
-the painter. “Now let Joe Sharpe get in the bow of the boat, to keep
-her from running against anything, and we’ll haul her right through,”
-exclaimed Harry.
-
-Joe took his place in the bow, and, pushing the boat off, let her float
-into the current. Then the three other boys pulled on the rope, and
-were delighted to see the boat glide under the bridge. Suddenly Joe
-gave a wild yell. “She’s sinking, boys!” he cried: “let go the rope, or
-I’ll be drowned!” The boys, terribly frightened, dropped the rope, and
-in another minute the boat floated back on the current, half full of
-water, and without Joe. Almost as soon as it came in sight, Harry had
-thrown off his shoes and jumped into the river.
-
-[Illustration: HARRY SWIMS FOR THE EDDY.]
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER III.
-
-
-As Harry vanished, Joe’s head appeared, as he climbed up the side of
-the bridge and joined his brother and Tom. Their anxiety was now for
-Harry, who had been swept through the channel under the bridge, and
-was manfully swimming toward the eddy where the boys had landed. He
-came ashore none the worse for his bath, and was delighted to find
-that Joe was not only safe but dry. Joe explained that the boat had
-drifted against one of the piles of the bridge, and the current and
-the tow-rope together had forced one of her sides so low down that the
-water began to pour in. Joe thought that if the river intended to get
-into the boat, he had better get out; so he sprung up and caught one of
-the timbers of the bridge, and so climbed safely up to the roadway.
-The boat, relieved of his weight and freed from the tow-line, drifted
-quietly away, and was now floating peacefully on the river about twenty
-rods from the shore.
-
-Luckily an old man in a row-boat saw the runaway _Whitewing_, and
-kindly caught her and brought her up to the bridge. As the boys baled
-her out, they told him how the accident happened, and the gruff old
-man said it “sarved ’em right.” “When you tow a boat next time,” he
-continued, “you’ll know enough to put all your weight in the stern.
-Did you ever see a steamboat towing a row-boat with a man in the bow?
-If ever you do, you’ll see him going overboard mighty quick. A boat’ll
-sheer all over creation if you tow her with a fellow in the bow. You
-just put the biggest of you fellows in the stern of that there boat,
-and she’ll go through under the bridge just as steady as a church.”
-
-The boys gladly took the old man’s advice. When the boat was baled
-out, they floated the rope down again, and when it was made fast, Tom
-Schuyler, who was the heaviest of the boys, offered to sit in the
-stern. His weight brought the bow of the boat out of the water, and she
-was towed quickly and safely through. The boys resumed their places as
-soon as Harry had put on dry clothes, and after a short and easy row
-glided under the Spuyten Duyvel railway bridge, and found themselves on
-the broad and placid Hudson. They rowed on for nearly a mile, and then,
-having found a little sandy cove, ran the boat aground, and went ashore
-to rest. After a good swim, which all greatly enjoyed, including Harry,
-who said that his recent bath at Farmersbridge ought not to be counted,
-since it was more of a duty than a pleasure, they sat down to eat a
-nice cold lunch of ham sandwiches that Mrs. Wilson had kindly prepared;
-and when they were no longer hungry, they stretched themselves lazily
-in the shade.
-
-“Well, boys,” said Harry, “we made a big mistake at the bridge; but we
-learned something, and we won’t get the boat swamped that way again.”
-
-“I’m awfully obliged to Harry for jumping in after me,” said Joe; “but
-it’s the first time I ever heard of a captain jumping over after a
-sailor. When a sailor falls overboard, the captain just stands on the
-deck and looks around, kind of careless like, while the second mate and
-four sailors jump into a boat and pick the man up. That’s the way it’s
-done; for I know a fellow that saw a man fall overboard on a steamship,
-and he said that was how the captain did.”
-
-“All right,” said Harry; “I won’t jump in for you again, Joe. The
-fact is, boys, I oughtn’t to have done it without waiting to find out
-whether there was really anything the matter with Joe. I’ll tell you
-what we’ll do. Joe is a first-rate swimmer, and we’ll make a rule that
-whenever anybody is to jump into the river for anything, Joe shall do
-it. What do you say?”
-
-“Oh, I’m willing enough,” said Joe. “I don’t care who jumps as long as
-the captain don’t. It won’t look well for the captain to be all the
-time jumping overboard to pick somebody up.”
-
-“A better rule,” remarked Tom, “would be that no fellow shall fall
-overboard.”
-
-“I move to amend that,” cried Jim, “by forbidding any accidents to
-happen to any of us.”
-
-“But you can’t do that,” said Tom, who never understood a joke.
-“Accidents never would happen if people could help themselves.”
-
-“Well,” said Harry, “if the rest of you will agree not to fall
-overboard, I’ll promise that the captain sha’n’t spend all his time
-in jumping after you. But if you are all ready, we’d better start on.
-There’s a nice little breeze, and we can rest in the boat.”
-
-By this time Harry’s shirt and trousers, which had been wrung out and
-hung up on a bush, were perfectly dry. He packed them away with his
-rubber blanket rolled tightly around them, and Jim attended to the duty
-of stepping the mast. Then the boys took their places, and Joe pushed
-the boat off with the boat-hook. The gentle breeze filled the sail, and
-the _Whitewing_ went peacefully on her way up the river.
-
-“Boys,” said Harry, presently, “it’s getting awfully hot.”
-
-“That’s because we’re sailing right before the wind,” said Tom. “We are
-going just about as fast as the wind goes, and that’s the reason why we
-don’t feel it.”
-
-“Is this a lecture on wind, by Professor Thomas Schuyler?” asked Joe.
-“Because if it is, I’d rather hear it when it’s cooler. Let’s go over
-to the other side of the river, where we can get in the shade of the
-Palisades.”
-
-It was now about three o’clock, and the sun was very hot. The boat
-seemed to the boys to creep across the river, and the Palisades seemed
-to move away just as fast as they approached them. When they finally
-did come into the shadow of those huge rocks, they thought they had
-never known anything so delightful as the change from the scorching
-sunshine to the cool shade. Joe and his brother stretched themselves
-out, and put their blankets under their heads; presently they grew
-tired of talking, and in a little while they were fast asleep. Tom was
-not sleepy; but he was so delighted with the beauty of the shore, as
-seen from the boat, that he did not care to talk.
-
-For a long time the boat glided stealthily along. The Palisades were
-passed, and a long pier projecting into the river from the west shore
-gradually came in sight. When the boat came up with the pier, half a
-dozen barges lay along-side of it, into which men were sliding enormous
-cakes of ice. The Sharpe boys woke up, and proposed to stop and get a
-little ice. The men let them pick up as many small pieces of ice as
-they could carry, and they went on their way so much refreshed that
-they chattered away as gayly as possible.
-
-Uncle John had warned them to select a camping-ground long before dark.
-They remembered this advice, and at about five o’clock they landed
-on a little low point of land a few miles below the entrance to the
-Highlands. They first hauled the boat a little way up the beach, so
-that it would be sure not to float off, and then began to take the
-tent, the cooking things, and the provisions for supper out of her.
-
-“We want to pitch the tent and make a fire,” said Harry, “and somebody
-ought to get some milk. Let’s pitch the tent first.”
-
-“I’ll do that,” said Tom, “while you fellows get the supper.”
-
-“It takes two or three fellows to pitch the tent,” said Harry; “you
-can’t do it alone.”
-
-“I’ll undertake to pitch it alone,” replied Tom. “One of you can get
-firewood, one can go for milk, and the other can get out the things for
-supper. Here goes for the tent.”
-
-The tent was furnished with two upright poles and a ridge-pole, each
-one of which was made in two pieces and joined together with ferules,
-like a fishing-rod. Tom selected a soft sandy spot close by the water’s
-edge, where he spread out the tent, and pinned down each of the four
-corners with rough wooden pins, which he cut with the hatchet from a
-piece of driftwood. Then he crept under the canvas with the poles.
-He put one of the upright poles in its place with the end of the
-ridge-pole over it, and then, holding the other end of the ridge-pole
-in one hand, he put the second pole in position with his other hand,
-and pushed the end of the ridge-pole into its proper place. The tent
-was now pitched; and all that remained to be done was to tighten the
-four corner pegs and to drive in the other ones.
-
-Meanwhile Jim had taken one of the pails and gone toward a distant
-farm-house for milk. Joe had collected a pile of firewood, and Harry
-had lighted the fire and put the other tin pail half full of water
-to boil over it. By the time the water had boiled, Jim had returned,
-bringing the milk with him. It did not take long to make coffee; and
-then the boys sat down on the sand, each with a tin cup of hot coffee
-at his side, and proceeded to eat a supper of ham sandwiches and cake.
-It was not the kind of supper that they expected to have on subsequent
-nights; but Mrs. Wilson’s sandwiches and cake had to be eaten in order
-to keep them from spoiling. After the coffee was gone they each had
-a cup of cold milk, and then put the rest of it in a shady place to
-be used for breakfast. The provisions were carefully covered up, so
-as to protect them in case of rain, and then the beds were made. This
-last operation was a very easy one, since the sand was soft enough for
-a mattress, and all that needed to be done was to spread the rubber
-blankets on the ground as a protection from the damp. Then the boys
-rolled up their spare clothing for pillows, and, wrapping themselves in
-their blankets, were soon sound asleep.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER IV.
-
-
-Some time in the middle of the night Joe Sharpe woke up from a dream
-that he had fallen into the river, and could not get out. He thought
-that he had caught hold of the supports of a bridge, and had drawn
-himself partly out of the water, but that he had not strength enough
-to drag his legs out, and that, on the contrary, he was slowly sinking
-back. When he awoke he found that he was very cold, and that his
-blanket felt particularly heavy. He put his hand down to move the
-blanket, when, to his great surprise, he found that he was lying with
-his legs in a pool of water.
-
-Joe instantly shouted to the other boys, and told them to wake up,
-for it was raining, and the tent was leaking. As each boy woke up he
-found himself as wet as Joe, and at first all supposed that it was
-raining heavily. They soon found, however, that no rain-drops were
-pattering on the outside of the tent, and that the stars were shining
-through the open flap. “There’s water in this tent,” said Tom, with
-the air of having made a grand discovery. “If any of you fellows have
-been throwing water on me, it was a mean trick,” said Jim. All at once
-an idea struck Harry. “Boys,” he exclaimed, “it’s the tide! We’ve got
-to get out of this place mighty quick, or the tide will wash the tent
-away.”
-
-The boys sprung up, and rushed out of the tent. They had gone to bed
-at low-tide, and as the tide rose it had gradually invaded the tent.
-The boat was still safe, but the water had surrounded it, and in a very
-short time would be deep enough to float it. The tide was still rising,
-and it was evident that no time should be lost if the tent was to be
-saved.
-
-Two of the boys hurriedly seized the blankets and other articles which
-were in the tent, and carried them on to the higher ground; while the
-other two pulled up the pins, and dragged the tent out of reach of the
-water. Then they pulled the boat farther up the beach, and, having thus
-made everything safe, had leisure to discover that they were miserably
-cold, and that their clothes, from the waist down, were wet through.
-
-Luckily, their spare clothing, which they had used for pillows, was
-untouched by the water, so that they were able to put on dry shirts
-and trousers. Their blankets, however, had been thoroughly soaked, and
-it was too cold to think of sleeping without them. There was nothing
-to be done but to build a fire, and sit around it until daylight. It
-was by no means easy to collect firewood in the dark; and as soon as a
-boy succeeded in getting an armful of driftwood, he usually stumbled
-and fell down with it. There was not very much fun in this; but when
-the fire finally blazed up, and its pleasant warmth conquered the cold
-night air, the boys began to regain their spirits.
-
-“I wonder what time it is?” said one.
-
-Tom had a watch, but he had forgotten to wind it up for two or three
-nights, and it had stopped at eight o’clock. The boys were quite sure,
-however, that they could not have been asleep more than half an hour.
-
-“It’s about one o’clock,” said Harry, presently.
-
-“I don’t believe it’s more than nine,” said Joe.
-
-“We must have gone into the tent about an hour after sunset,” continued
-Harry, “and the sun sets between six and seven. It was low-tide then,
-and it’s pretty near high-tide now; and since the tide runs up for
-about six hours, it must be somewhere between twelve and one.”
-
-“You’re right,” exclaimed Jim. “Look at the stars. That bright star
-over there in the west was just rising when we went to bed.”
-
-“You ought to say ‘turned in!’” said Joe. “Sailors never go to bed;
-they always ‘turn in.’”
-
-“Well, we can’t turn in any more to-night,” replied Tom. “What do you
-say, boys? suppose we have breakfast--it’ll pass away the time, and we
-can have another breakfast by-and-by.”
-
-Now that the boys thought of it, they began to feel hungry, for they
-had had a very light supper. Everybody felt that hot coffee would be
-very nice; so they all went to work--made coffee, fried a piece of ham,
-and, with a few slices of bread, made a capital breakfast. They wrung
-out the wet blankets and clothes, and hung them up by the fire to dry.
-Then they had to collect more firewood; and gradually the faint light
-of the dawn became visible, before they really had time to find the
-task of waiting for daylight tiresome.
-
-They decided that it would not do to start with wet blankets, since
-they could not dry them in the boat. They therefore continued to keep
-up a brisk fire, and to watch the blankets closely, in order to see
-that they did not get scorched. After a time the sun came out bright
-and hot, and took the drying business in charge. The boys went into the
-river, and had a nice long swim, and then spent some time in carefully
-packing everything into the boat. By the time the blankets were dry,
-and they were ready to start, the tide had fallen so low that the boat
-was high and dry; and in spite of all their efforts they could not
-launch her while she was loaded.
-
-“We’ll have to take all the things out of her,” said Harry.
-
-“It reminds me,” remarked Joe, “of Robinson Crusoe that time he built
-his big canoe, and then couldn’t launch it.”
-
-“Robinson wasn’t very sharp,” said Jim. “Why didn’t he make a set of
-rollers, and put them on the boat?”
-
-“Much good rollers would have been,” replied Joe. “Wasn’t there a hill
-between the boat and the water? He couldn’t roll a heavy boat uphill,
-could he?”
-
-“He could have made a couple of pulleys, and rigged a rope through
-them, and then made a windlass, and put the rope round it,” argued Jim.
-
-“Yes; and he could have built a steam-engine and a railroad, and
-dragged the boat down to the shore that way, just about as easy.”
-
-[Illustration: “IF YOU WANT TO DIG, DIG. I DON’T INTEND TO DO ANY MORE
-DIGGING.”]
-
-“He couldn’t dig a canal, for he thought about that, and found it would
-take too much work,” said Jim.
-
-“But we can,” cried Harry. “If we just scoop out a little sand, we can
-launch the boat with everything in her!”
-
-The boys liked the idea of a canal; and they each found a large shingle
-on the beach, and began to dig. They dug for nearly an hour, but the
-boat was no nearer being launched than when they began. Tom stopped
-digging, and made a calculation. “It will take about two days of hard
-work to dig a canal deep enough to float that boat. If you want to dig,
-dig; I don’t intend to do any more digging.”
-
-When the other boys considered the matter, they saw that Tom was right,
-and they gave up the idea of making a canal. It was now about ten
-o’clock, and they were rather tired and very hungry. A second breakfast
-was agreed to be necessary, and once more the fire was built up and a
-meal prepared. Then the boat was unloaded and launched, and the boys,
-taking off their shoes and rolling up their trousers, waded in the
-water and reloaded her. It was noon by the sun before they finally had
-everything in order and resumed their cruise.
-
-There was no wind, and it was necessary to take to the oars. The
-disadvantage of starting at so late an hour soon became painfully
-plain. The sun was so nearly overhead that the heat was almost
-unbearable, and there was not a particle of shade. The boys had not
-had a full night’s sleep, and had tired themselves before starting
-by trying to dig a canal. Of course the labor of rowing in such
-circumstances was very severe; and it was not long before first one and
-then another proposed to go ashore and rest in the shade.
-
-“Hadn’t we better keep on till we get into the Highlands. We can do it
-in a quarter of an hour,” said Tom.
-
-As Tom was pulling the stroke oar, and doing rather more work than any
-one else, the others agreed to row on as long as he would row. They
-soon reached the entrance to the Highlands, and landed at the foot of
-the great hill called St. Anthony’s Nose. They were very glad to make
-the boat fast to a tree that grew close to the water, and to clamber a
-little way up the hill into the shade.
-
-“What will we do to pass away the time till it gets cooler?” said
-Harry, after they had rested awhile.
-
-“I can tell you what I’m going to do,” said Tom; “I’m going to get some
-of the sleep that I didn’t get last night, and you’d better follow my
-example.”
-
-All the boys at once found that they were sleepy; and, having brought
-the tent up from the boat, they spread it on the ground for a bed,
-and presently were sleeping soundly. The mosquitoes came and feasted
-on them, and the innumerable insects of the summer woods crawled over
-them, and explored their necks, shirt-sleeves, and trousers-legs, as is
-the pleasant custom of insects of an inquiring turn of mind.
-
-“What’s that?” cried Harry, suddenly sitting up, as the sound of a
-heavy explosion died away in long, rolling echoes.
-
-“I heard it,” said Joe; “it’s a cannon. The cadets up at West Point
-are firing at a mark with a tremendous big cannon.”
-
-“Let’s go up and see them,” exclaimed Jim. “It’s a great deal cooler
-than it was.”
-
-With the natural eagerness of boys to be in the neighborhood of a
-cannon, they made haste to gather up the tent and carry it to the boat.
-As they came out from under the thick trees, they saw that the sky in
-the north was as black as midnight, and that a thunder-storm was close
-at hand.
-
-“Your cannon, Joe, was a clap of thunder,” said Harry. “We’re going to
-get wet again.”
-
-“We needn’t get wet,” said Tom. “If we hurry up we can get the tent
-pitched and put the things in it, so as to keep them dry.”
-
-They worked rapidly, for the rain was approaching fast, but it was not
-easy to pitch the tent on a side hill. It was done, however, after
-a fashion; and the blankets and other things that were liable to be
-injured by the wet were safely under shelter before the storm reached
-them.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER V.
-
-
-It was a terrific storm. The wind swept down the river, raising a ridge
-of white water in its path. The rain came down harder, so the boys
-thought, than they had ever seen it come down before, and the glare of
-the lightning and the crash of the thunder were frightful.
-
-“What luck it is that we got the tent pitched in time,” exclaimed Joe.
-“We’re as dry and comfortable here as if we were in a house.”
-
-“Pick your blankets up quick, boys,” cried Harry. “Here’s the water
-coming in under the tent.”
-
-Joe had boasted a little too soon. The water running down the side of
-the hill was making its way in large quantities into the tent. To save
-their clothes and blankets, the boys had to stand up and hold them in
-their arms, which was by no means a pleasant occupation, especially as
-the cold rain-water was bathing their feet.
-
-“It can’t last long,” remarked Tom. “We’re all right if the lightning
-doesn’t strike us.”
-
-“Where’s the powder?” asked Harry.
-
-“Oh, it’s in the flask,” replied Joe, “and I’ve got the flask in my
-pocket.”
-
-“So, if the lightning strikes the tent, we’ll all be blown up,”
-exclaimed Harry. “This is getting more and more pleasant.”
-
-The boys were not yet at the end of their troubles. The rain had
-loosened the earth, and the tent-pins, of which only four had been
-used, were no longer fit to hold the tent. So, while they were talking
-about the powder, the tent suddenly blew down, upsetting the boys as it
-fell, and burying them under the wet canvas.
-
-“Lie still, fellows,” said Tom, as the other boys tried to wriggle out
-from under the tent. “We’ve got to get wet now, anyway; but perhaps, if
-we stay as we are, we can manage to keep the blankets dry.”
-
-The wet tent felt miserably cold as it clung to their heads and
-shoulders, but the boys kept under it, and held their blankets and
-spare shirts wrapped tightly in their arms. Luckily the storm was
-nearly at an end when the tent blew down, and a few moments later the
-rain ceased, and the crew of the _Whitewing_, in a very damp condition,
-crept out and congratulated themselves that they had escaped with no
-worse injury than a wet skin.
-
-“Where are your rubber blankets?” asked Harry, presently.
-
-“Rolled up with the other blankets,” answered everybody.
-
-“It won’t do to tell when we get home,” remarked Harry, “that, instead
-of using the water-proof blankets to keep ourselves dry, we used
-ourselves to keep the water-proofs dry. It’s the most stupid thing
-we’ve done yet; and I’m as bad as anybody else.”
-
-“It was a good deal worse to pitch a tent without digging a trench
-around it,” said Tom. “If I’d dug a trench two inches deep just back of
-that tent, not a drop of water would have run into it.”
-
-“And I don’t think much of the plan of using only four pins to hold a
-tent down when a hurricane is coming on,” said Joe.
-
-“And I think the least said by a fellow who carries two pounds of
-powder in his pocket in a thunder-storm the better,” added Jim.
-
-It took some time to bale the water out of the boat, for the rain
-and the spray from the river had half-filled it. But the shower had
-cooled the air, and the boys were glad to be at work again after their
-confinement in the tent. They were soon ready to start; and, rowing
-easily and steadily, they passed through the Highlands, and reached a
-nice camping spot on the east bank of the river below Poughkeepsie,
-before half-past five.
-
-This time they selected a place to pitch the tent with great care. It
-was easy to find the high-water mark on the shore, and the tent was
-pitched a little above it, so as to be safe from a disaster like that
-of the previous night. Harry wanted it pitched on the top of a high
-bank; but the others insisted that, as long as they were safe from the
-tide, there was no need of putting the tent a long distance from the
-water, and that they had selected the only spot where they could have a
-bed of sand to sleep on.
-
-This important business being settled, supper was the next subject of
-attention.
-
-“We haven’t been as regular about our meals as we ought to be,”
-said Harry, “but it hasn’t been our fault. We’ll have a good supper
-to-night, at any rate. How would you like some hot turtle-soup?”
-
-“Just the thing,” said Joe. “The bread is beginning to get a little
-dry; but we can soak it in the soup.”
-
-“About going for milk,” continued Harry; “we ought to arrange that and
-the other regular duties. Suppose after this we take regular turns.
-One fellow can pitch the tent, another can go for milk, another can
-get the firewood, and the other can cook. We can arrange it according
-to alphabetical order. For instance, Tom Schuyler pitches the tent
-to-night; Jim Sharpe goes for milk, Joe gets the firewood, and I cook.
-The next time we camp, Jim will pitch the tent, Joe will get the milk,
-I will get the wood, and Tom will cook. Is that fair?”
-
-The boys said it was, and they agreed to adopt Harry’s proposal. Jim
-went off with the milk-pail, and when the fire was ready, Harry took a
-can of soup and put it on the coals to be heated.
-
-Jim found a house quite near at hand, where he bought two quarts of
-milk and a loaf of bread, and was back again at the camp before the
-soup was ready. He found the boys lying near the fire, waiting for the
-soup to heat and the coffee to boil.
-
-“That soup takes a long time to heat through,” said Tom. “There isn’t a
-bit of steam coming out of it yet.”
-
-“How can any steam come out of it when it’s soldered up tight,” replied
-Harry.
-
-[Illustration: THE SOUP EXPLOSION.]
-
-“You don’t mean to tell me that you’ve put the can on the fire
-without punching a hole in the top?”
-
-“Of course I have. What on earth should I punch a hole in it for?”
-
-“Because--” cried Tom, hastily springing up.
-
-But he was interrupted by a report like that of a small cannon: a cloud
-of ashes rose over the fire, and a shower of soup fell just where Tom
-had been lying.
-
-“That’s the reason why,” resumed Tom. “The steam has burst the can, and
-the soup has gone up.”
-
-“We’ve got another can,” said Harry, “and we’ll punch a hole in that
-one. What an idiot I was not to think of its bursting! It’s a good job
-that it didn’t hurt us. I should hate to have the newspapers say that
-we had been blown up and awfully mangled with soup.”
-
-The other can of soup was safely heated, and the boys made a
-comfortable supper. They drove a stake in the sand, and fastened the
-boat’s painter securely to it, and then “turned in.”
-
-“No tide to rouse us up to-night, boys,” said Harry, as he rolled
-himself in his blanket. “I sha’n’t wake up till daylight.”
-
-“We’d better take an early start,” remarked Tom. “We haven’t got on
-very far because we started so late this morning. If we get off by six
-every morning, we can lie off in the middle of the day, and start again
-about three o’clock. It’s no fun rowing with the sun right overhead.”
-
-“Well, it isn’t more than eight o’clock now; and, if we take eight
-hours’ sleep, we can turn out at four o’clock,” said Harry. “But who
-is going to wake us up? Joe and Jim are sound asleep already, and I’m
-awful sleepy myself. I don’t believe one of us will wake up before
-seven o’clock anyway.”
-
-Tom made no answer, for he had dropped asleep while Harry was talking.
-The latter thought he must be pretending to sleep, and was just
-resolving to tell Tom that it wasn’t very polite to refuse to answer a
-civil question, when he found himself muttering something about a game
-of base-ball, and awoke, with a start, to discover that he could not
-possibly keep awake another moment.
-
-The boys slept on. The moon came out and shone in at the open
-tent-flap, and the tide rose to high-water mark, but not quite high
-enough to reach the tent. By-and-by the wheezing of a tow-boat broke
-the stillness, and occasionally a hoarse steam-whistle echoed among the
-hills; but the boys slept so soundly that they would not have heard a
-locomotive had it whistled its worst within a rod of the tent.
-
-The river had been like a mill-pond since the thunder-storm, but about
-midnight a heavy swell rolled in toward the shore. It came on, growing
-larger and larger, and, rushing up the little beach with a fierce roar,
-dashed into the tent and overwhelmed the sleeping boys without the
-slightest warning.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER VI.
-
-
-The wave receded as suddenly as it came. The boys sprang up in a
-terrible fright, and indeed there are few men who in their place would
-not have been frightened. The shock of the cold water was enough to
-startle the strongest nerves, and as the boys rushed to the door of the
-tent, in a blind race for life, they fully believed that their last
-hour had come. Before they could get out of the tent, a second wave
-swept up and rose above their knees. With wild cries of terror the two
-younger boys caught hold of Tom, and, losing their footing, dragged him
-down. Harry caught at Tom impulsively, with a vague idea of saving him
-from drowning, but the only result of his effort was that he went down
-with the rest. Fortunately the wave receded before the boys had time
-to drown, and left them struggling in a heap on the wet sand. There was
-no return of the water, and in a few moments the boys were outside of
-the tent and on the top of the bluff above the river.
-
-“It must have been a tidal wave,” said Jim. “Oh, I’d give anything if I
-was home! The water will come up again, and we’ll all be drowned!”
-
-“It was the swell of a steamboat,” said Tom. “There’s the boat now,
-just going around that point.”
-
-“You’re right,” said Harry. “It was nothing but the swell of the
-night-boat. What precious fools we were not to think of it before!
-To-morrow night we’ll pitch the tent about a thousand feet above the
-water.”
-
-“Then there’ll be a water-spout or something,” said Jim. “We’re bound
-to get wet whatever we do. We only started yesterday, and here we’ve
-been wet through three times.”
-
-“And Harry has been wet four times, counting the time he jumped in the
-Harlem for me,” added Joe.
-
-“It won’t do to stand here and talk about it,” said Tom. “We’ve got to
-have a fire or we’ll freeze to death. Look at the way Joe’s teeth are
-chattering. The blankets and clothes are all wet, and the sooner we dry
-them the sooner we’ll get warm.”
-
-[Illustration: THE BOYS BUILT A ROARING FIRE ON A LARGE FLAT ROCK.]
-
-There happened to be a dead tree near by, and it was soon converted
-into firewood. The boys built a roaring fire on a large flat rock, and
-after it had burnt for a little while they pushed it about six feet
-from the place where they had started it, and, after piling fresh fuel
-on it, laid down on the hot rock with their feet to the flames. The
-fire had heated the rock so that they could hardly bear to touch it,
-but the heat dried their wet clothes rapidly, and kept them from taking
-severe colds. Meanwhile their blankets had been spread out near the
-fire, and in half an hour were very nearly dry, and pretty severely
-scorched. Two large logs were then rolled on the fire, and when they
-were in a blaze the boys wrapped themselves in their blankets, and,
-lying as near to the fire as they could without actually burning,
-resumed their interrupted sleep. They found the rock rather a hard bed,
-and it offered no temptation to laziness; so it happened that they were
-all broad awake at half-past four; and though somewhat stiff from lying
-on a rocky bed, were none the worse for their night’s adventure.
-
-“There’s one thing I’m going to do this very day,” said Harry, as they
-were dressing themselves after their morning swim. “I’m going to write
-to the Department to send us a big rubber bag, that we can put our
-spare clothes in and keep them dry. There’s no fun in being wet and
-having nothing dry to put on.”
-
-“If we have the bag sent to Albany, it will get there by the time we
-do,” said Tom. “You write the letter while we are getting breakfast.”
-
-So Harry wrote to the Department as follows:
-
- “DEAR UNCLE JOHN,--We’ve been wet through with a steamboat once,
- and the tide wet us the first night, and we got rained on, and I
- jumped in to get Joe out, and we’ve had a gorgeous time. Please send
- us a big water-proof bag to put our spare clothes in, so that we
- can have something dry. Please send it to Albany, and we will stop
- there at the post-office for it. Please send it right away. You said
- the Department furnished everything. We’ve been dry twice since we
- started, but it didn’t last long. There never was such fun. All the
- boys send their love to you. Please don’t forget the bag. From your
- affectionate nephew,
-
- “HARRY.”
-
-“This was the morning that you were going to sleep till eight o’clock
-without waking up, Harry,” said Tom, as they were eating their
-breakfast.
-
-“There’s nothing that will wake a fellow up so quick as the Hudson
-River rolling in on him. I hadn’t expected to wake up in that way,”
-answered Harry.
-
-“So far we have done nothing but find out how stupid we are,” said Tom.
-“Seems to me we must have found it pretty near all out by this time.
-There can’t be many more stupid things that we haven’t done.”
-
-“There won’t any accident happen to-night,” replied Harry; “for I’ll
-make sure that the tent is pitched so far from the water that we can’t
-be wet again. I wonder if every fellow learns to camp out by getting
-into scrapes as we do. It is very certain that we won’t forget what we
-learn on this cruise.”
-
-“I’m beginning to get tired of ham,” exclaimed Joe. “We’ve been eating
-ham ever since we started. Let’s get some eggs to-day.”
-
-“And some raspberries,” suggested Jim. “It’s the season for them.”
-
-“And let’s catch some fish,” said Tom.
-
-“That’s what we’ll do,” said Harry. “We’ll sail till eleven o’clock,
-and then we’ll go fishing and catch our dinner.”
-
-This suggestion pleased everybody; and when, at about six o’clock, they
-set sail with a nice breeze from the south, everybody kept a lookout
-for a good fishing-ground, and wondered why they had not thought of
-fishing before.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER VII.
-
-
-The sun was getting to be rather too hot for boating when the boys saw
-the half-sunken wreck of a canal-boat close to the west shore, where
-there was a nice shady grove. They immediately crossed the river, and,
-landing near the wreck, began to get their fishing-tackle in order.
-
-As there were only two poles, one of which belonged to Harry, and the
-other to Tom, the two Sharpe boys were obliged either to cut poles
-for themselves, or to watch the others while they fished. Jim cut a
-pole for himself, but Joe preferred to lie on the bank. “I don’t care
-to fish, anyhow,” he said. “I’ll agree to eat twice as much fish as
-anybody else, if I can be excused from fishing.”
-
-“If you don’t want to fish, you’d better hunt bait for us,” said Tom.
-
-“I never thought about bait,” exclaimed Harry. “How are we going to dig
-for worms without a spade?”
-
-“Who wants any worms?” replied Tom. “Grasshoppers are the thing; and
-the field just back of here is full of them. Come, Joe, catch us some
-grasshoppers, won’t you?”
-
-“How many do you want?” asked Joe. “I don’t want to waste good
-grasshoppers on fellows who won’t use them. Let’s see: suppose I get
-you ten grasshoppers apiece. Will that do?”
-
-“Are you getting lazy, Joe?” said Tom, “or are you sick? A fellow who
-don’t want to fish must have something wrong in his insides. Harry,
-you’d better give him some medicine.”
-
-“Oh, I’m all right,” replied Joe. “I’m a little sleepy to-day, but I’ll
-get your grasshoppers.”
-
-Joe took an empty tin can and went in search of grasshoppers, while
-the rest were getting their hooks and lines ready. In a short time
-he returned, and handed the can to Tom. “There’s just thirty-one
-grasshoppers in that can,” said he. “I threw in one for good measure.
-Now go ahead and fish, and I’ll have a nap.” So saying, he stretched
-himself on the ground, and the other boys began to fish.
-
-There were quantities of perch near the old canal-boat, and they bit
-ravenously at the grasshoppers. It took only about a quarter of an hour
-to catch nearly three dozen fish. These were more than the boys could
-possibly eat; and Tom was just going to remark that they had better
-stop fishing, when they were startled by a loud cry from Joe. Harry, in
-swinging his line over his head so as to cast out a long way into the
-river, had succeeded in hooking Joe in the right ear.
-
-[Illustration: JOE IS CAUGHT.]
-
-Of course Harry was extremely sorry, and he said so several times; but,
-as Joe pointed out, “talk won’t pull a hook out of a fellow’s ear!”
-The barb made it impracticable to draw the hook out, and it was quite
-impossible that Joe should enjoy the cruise with a fish-hook in his
-ear. Jim said that the hook must be cut out; but Joe objected to having
-his ear cut to pieces with a dull jack-knife. In this emergency
-Tom proposed to break off the shank of the hook, and then to push the
-remainder of it through the ear. It was no easy matter, however, to
-break the steel. Every time the hook was touched, Joe winced with pain;
-but finally Tom managed to break the shank with the aid of the pair of
-pliers that formed part of the stores. The hook was then gently and
-firmly pressed through the ear, and carefully drawn out.
-
-“I knew,” said Tom, “that something must be wrong when Joe said he
-didn’t want to fish. This ought to be a warning to him.”
-
-“It’s a warning to me,” said Harry, “not to throw my line all over the
-State of New York.”
-
-“Oh, it’s all right now,” said Joe. “Only the next time I go cruising
-with Harry, I’m going to take a pair of cutting pincers to cut off the
-shanks of fish-hooks after he gets through fishing. We’d better get a
-pair at Hudson, anyhow, or else we’ll all be stuck full of hooks, if
-Harry does any more fishing.”
-
-Harry was so humbled by the result of his carelessness that he offered,
-by way of penance, to clean and cook the fish. When this was done,
-and the fish were served up smoking hot, they were so good that Joe
-forgot his damaged ear, and Harry recovered his spirits. After a course
-of fish and bread, a can of peaches was opened for dessert, and then
-followed a good long rest. By three o’clock the heat began to lessen,
-and the _Whitewing_ started on her way with a better breeze than she
-had yet been favored with.
-
-The boat travelled swiftly, and the breeze gradually freshened. The
-whitecaps were beginning to make their appearance on the river before
-it occurred to the boys that they must cross over to the east shore,
-in order to camp where they could find shade while getting breakfast
-the next morning. It had been one of Uncle John’s most earnest bits
-of advice that they should always have shade in the morning. “Nothing
-spoils the temper,” he had said, “like cooking under a bright sun; so
-make sure that you keep in the shade until after breakfast.” Harry
-felt a little nervous about crossing the river in so fresh a breeze,
-since, as the breeze blew from the south, the boat could not sail
-directly across the river without bringing the sea on her beam. He
-did not mention that he was nervous, however, and he showed excellent
-judgment in crossing the river diagonally, so as to avoid exposing the
-broadside of the boat to the waves, that by this time were unpleasantly
-high. The east bank was thus reached without taking a drop of water
-into the boat, and she was then kept on her course up the river, within
-a few rods of the shore.
-
-This was a wise precaution in one respect; for, if the boat had
-capsized, the boys could easily have swum ashore; but still it is
-always risky to keep close to the shore, unless you know that there
-are no rocks or snags in the way. Harry never thought of the danger of
-being shipwrecked with the shore so close at hand, and was enjoying
-the cooling breeze and the speed of the boat, when suddenly the
-_Whitewing_ brought up with a crash that pitched everybody into the
-bottom of the boat. She had struck a sunken rock, and the speed at
-which she was going was so great that one of her planks was stove in.
-Before the boys could pick themselves up, the water had rushed in, and
-was rising rapidly. “Jump overboard, everybody!” cried Harry. “She
-won’t float with us in her.” There was no time in which to pull off
-shirts and trousers, and the boys plunged overboard without even taking
-their hats off. They then took hold of the boat, two on each side of
-her, and swam toward the shore. With so much water in her, the boat
-was tremendously heavy; but the boys persevered, and finally reached
-shallow water, where they could wade and drag her out on the sand.
-
-“Here we are wet again!” exclaimed Jim. “The blankets are wet, too,
-this time.”
-
-“Never mind,” replied Tom. “It’s not more than five o’clock, and we can
-get them dry before night.”
-
-“We’ll have to work pretty fast, then,” said Harry. “Jim and Joe had
-better build a big fire and dry the things, while you and I empty the
-boat; or I’ll empty the boat, and you can pitch the tent. We’ll have to
-put off supper till we can make sure of a dry bed.”
-
-Harry took the things out of the boat one by one. Everything was wet
-except the contents of the tin boxes, into which the water luckily had
-not penetrated. As soon as the fire was built, Jim and Joe gave their
-whole attention to drying the blankets and the spare clothing; and
-when the boat was emptied, it was found that a hole nearly six inches
-long and four inches wide had been made through one of the bottom
-planks. Harry and Tom set to work to mend it. They took a piece of
-canvas--which had luckily been kept in one of the tin boxes and was
-quite dry--and tacked it neatly over the outside of the hole. They
-next covered the canvas with a thin coating of white-lead, except at
-the edges, where the white-lead was laid on very thickly. Over the
-canvas the piece of zinc that had been brought for just such a purpose
-was carefully tacked, and then thin strips of wood were placed over
-the edges of the tin, and screwed down tightly with screws that went
-through the zinc, but not through the canvas. Finally, white-lead was
-put all around the outer edge of the zinc, and the boat was then left
-bottom-side up on the sand, so that the white-lead could harden by
-exposure to the air.
-
-Nobody cared to go for milk in wet clothes; and so, when the boat was
-mended, the boys all sat around the fire to dry themselves, and made a
-supper of crackers. What with the heat and the wind, it was not very
-long before their clothes and blankets were thoroughly dried; and they
-could look forward to a comfortable night. The tent was pitched where
-no steamboat swell could possibly touch it, and the boat was apparently
-out of reach of the tide. It was very early when the boys “turned in,”
-and for the first time in the cruise they slept peacefully all night.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER VIII.
-
-
-The next morning the boys awoke early, having had a thoroughly
-good night’s rest. Tom, whose turn it was to go for milk, found a
-well-stocked farm-house, where he obtained not only milk, bread, and
-eggs, but a supply of butter and a chicken all ready for cooking. After
-breakfast the boat was put in the water, and, to the delight of all,
-proved to be almost as tight as she was before running into the rock.
-A little water came in at first under the edges of the zinc, but in a
-short time the wood swelled, and the leak entirely ceased.
-
-The boat was loaded, and the boys were ready to start soon after six
-o’clock. There was no wind, but the two long oars, pulled one by Tom
-and the other by Jim, sent her along at a fine rate. They rowed until
-ten o’clock, resting occasionally for a few moments, and then, as there
-were no signs of a breeze, and as it was growing excessively hot, they
-went ashore, to wait until afternoon before resuming their journey.
-
-The sun became hotter and hotter. The boys tried to fish, but there was
-no shade near the bank of the river, and it was too hot to stand or
-sit in the sunshine and wait for fish to bite. They went in swimming,
-but the sun, beating on their heads, seemed hotter while they were in
-the water than it did when they were on the land. Jim and Joe tried a
-game of mumble-to-peg, but they gave it up long before they had reached
-“ears.” It was probably the hottest day of the year; and as it was
-clearly impossible to row or to do anything else while the heat lasted,
-the boys brought their blankets from the boat, and, going to a grove
-not far from the shore, lay down and fell asleep.
-
-[Illustration: MUMBLE-THE-PEG.]
-
-They were astonished to find, when they awoke, that it was two
-o’clock. None of them had been accustomed to sleep in the daytime, and
-they could not understand how it came about that they had all slept
-for fully two hours. They had yet to learn that one of the results
-of “camping out,” or living in the open air, is an ability to sleep
-at almost any time. All animals and wild creatures, whether they are
-beasts or savages, have this happy faculty of sleeping in the daytime.
-It is one of the habits of our savage ancestors that comes back to us
-when we abandon civilization, and live as Aryan tribes, from whom we
-are descended, lived in the Far East, before they marched with their
-wives and children and cattle from India, and made themselves new homes
-in Europe.
-
-After lunch the boys prepared to start, although there was still no
-wind; but when they went down to the boat they found that the sun was
-as hot as ever. So they returned to the shade of the grove, and made up
-their minds to stay there until the end of the afternoon.
-
-“Harry,” said Tom, “we’ve been on the river three days, and we are
-only a little way above Hudson. How much longer will it be before we
-get to Albany?”
-
-“We ought to get there in two days more, even if we have to row all the
-way,” replied Harry.
-
-“And after we get to Albany, what are we to do next?”
-
-“We are going up the Champlain Canal to Fort Edward. There we will have
-a wagon to carry us and the boat to Warrensburg, on the Schroon River,
-and will go up the river to Schroon Lake. Uncle John laid out the route
-for us.”
-
-“How many days will it take us to get to the lake?” asked Tom.
-
-Harry thought awhile. “There’s two days more on the Hudson, two on the
-canal, and maybe two on the Schroon River. And then there’s a Sunday,
-which don’t count. It’ll be just a week before we get to the lake.”
-
-“I’ve got to be home by two weeks from next Monday,” continued Tom,
-“so I sha’n’t have much time on the lake. Can’t we get along a little
-faster? There’s a full-moon to-night, and suppose we sail all night--or
-row, if the wind doesn’t come up.”
-
-“That’s a first-rate idea,” exclaimed Harry. “We can take turns
-sleeping in the bottom of the boat. Why, if the breeze comes up in the
-night, we might make twenty or thirty miles before morning.”
-
-All the boys liked the plan of sailing at night, and they resolved to
-adopt it. While they were yet discussing it, a light breeze sprang up,
-from the south as usual, and they hastened to take advantage of it. In
-the course of an hour more the sun began to lose its power; and when
-they went ashore at six o’clock to cook their supper, they had sailed
-about fifteen miles.
-
-As they expected to make so much progress during the night, they were
-in no hurry about supper, and it was not until after seven o’clock
-that they again made sail. Harry divided the crew into watches--one
-consisting of himself and Joe Sharpe, and the other of Tom and Jim.
-Each watch was to have charge of the boat for three hours, while the
-other watch slept. At eight o’clock Tom and Jim lay down in the bottom
-of the boat, and Joe came aft to take Tom’s customary place at the
-sheet. Harry, of course, steered.
-
-All went well. The breeze was light but steady, and Harry kept the boat
-in the middle of the river to avoid another shipwreck. The watch below
-did not sleep much, for they had had a long nap at noon, and, besides,
-the novelty of their position made them wakeful. They had just dropped
-asleep when eleven o’clock arrived, and they were awakened to relieve
-the other watch. Tom went sleepily to the helm, and Harry and Joe
-gladly “turned in,” and were soon fast asleep.
-
-Tom always declares that he never closed his eyes while he was at the
-helm, and Jim also asserts that he was wide awake during his entire
-watch, though neither he nor Tom spoke for fear of waking up the other
-boys. It was strange that these two wide-awake young Moral Pirates did
-not notice that a large steamboat--one of the Albany night-boats--was
-in sight, until she was within a mile of them, and it is just possible
-that, without knowing it, they were a little too drowsy to keep a
-proper lookout.
-
-As soon as Tom saw the steamboat, he remarked, “Halloo! there’s one of
-the Albany boats,” and steered the boat over toward the east shore. The
-breeze had nearly died away, and the _Whitewing_ moved very slowly. The
-steamboat came rapidly down the river, her paddles throbbing loudly in
-the night air. Jim began to get a little uneasy, and said, “I hope she
-won’t run us down.” “Oh, there’s no danger!” replied Tom; “we shall get
-out of her way easy enough.” But, to his dismay, the steamboat, instead
-of keeping in the middle of the river, presently turned toward the east
-shore, as if she were bent upon running down the _Whitewing_. Tom was
-now really alarmed; and as he saw that the sail was doing very little
-good, he hurriedly told Jim to take down the mast and get out the oars
-as quick as possible. Jim rapidly obeyed the order, dropping the mast
-on Harry’s head, and catching Joe by the nose in his search for the
-oars. By this time Tom had begun to hail the steamboat at the top of
-his lungs; but no attention was paid to him by the steamboat men, since
-the noise of the paddles drowned Tom’s voice. Harry and Joe, who were
-now wide awake, saw what danger they were in, and they sprang to the
-oars. The steamboat was frightfully near, and still hugging the shore;
-but Tom called on the boys to give way with their oars, and steered
-straight for the shore, knowing that there must be room for the boat
-between the steamboat and the bank of the river, and fearing that if he
-steered in the opposite direction the steamboat might change her course
-and run them down, when they would have little chance of escape by
-swimming.
-
-It was certainly very doubtful if they could avoid the steamboat, and
-Tom was well aware of it. He told the other boys that, if they were
-sure to be run down, they must jump before the steamboat struck them,
-and dive, so as to escape the paddles. “I’ll tell you when to jump,
-if worst comes to worst,” said he; “but don’t you look around now, nor
-do anything but row. Row for your lives, boys.” And the boys did row
-gallantly. Harry had a pair of sculls, and Jim had a long oar, and
-between them they made the boat fly through the water. As they neared
-the shore, it seemed to them that there was not more than three feet
-of space between the steamboat and the land; and Tom had almost made
-up his mind that the cruise was coming to a sudden end, when the great
-steamboat swung her head around, and drew out toward the middle of the
-river. She did not seem to be more than a rod from them as she changed
-her course, though in reality she was probably much farther off. At the
-same moment the _Whitewing_ reached what appeared to be the shore, but
-what was really a long row of piles projecting about a foot above the
-water. The boys had just ceased rowing, and Tom had given the boat a
-sheer with the rudder, so as to bring her along-side of the piles, when
-the steamboat’s swell, which the boys, in their excitement over their
-narrow escape, had totally forgotten, came rushing up, seized the boat,
-and threw it over the piles into a shallow and muddy lagoon.
-
-It was almost miraculous that the boat was not capsized; but she was
-actually lifted up and thrown over the piles, without taking more than
-a few quarts of spray into her. When they saw that they were absolutely
-safe, the boys began to wonder how in the world they could get the boat
-back into the river, and Jim proposed to light the lantern and see if
-anything was missing out of the boat, and if she had been injured.
-
-“Now I see why the steamboat did not notice us,” exclaimed Tom.
-
-“Why?” asked all the others together.
-
-“Because,” he replied, “we have been such everlasting idiots as to sail
-at night without showing a light.”
-
-[Illustration: LIFTING THE BOAT OVER THE PILES.]
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER IX.
-
-
-The boat was in a shallow part of the river, between the shore and a
-long row of piles that marked the steamboat channel. Harry sounded with
-an oar, and found that the water was only two feet deep. “We’ll have
-to get overboard and drag the boat over the piles,” said he, “and it’s
-going to be a mighty hard job, too. That swell threw us over as neat as
-the bull threw Joe over the fence up at Lenox last summer.”
-
-“When I got pitched over that fence I stayed there,” said Joe. “I
-didn’t try to get back into the field where the bull was, and I don’t
-see what we want to get back where the steamboats are for.”
-
-“That’s so,” exclaimed Harry. “We’re safe enough here. Let’s get the
-water out of the boat, and keep on this side of the piles.”
-
-When the boat was made dry, and the lighted lantern was hoisted to the
-top of the mast, Tom resumed his place at the helm, and Harry and Joe
-prepared to take another nap. “I don’t want to grumble,” said Joe, “but
-I wish I didn’t have to lie on the coffee-pot and a tin cup. I don’t
-feel comfortable on that kind of bed.”
-
-“I’ll change with you if you like,” replied Harry. “I’m sleeping on a
-beautiful soft bottle of oil, and some sardine boxes, but I don’t want
-to be selfish and keep the best bed for myself.”
-
-“Oh, never mind,” returned Joe. “I’ll manage to sleep if Jim don’t step
-on my face. I always did hate to have anybody step on my face when I
-was asleep.”
-
-“Well, good-night everybody,” said Harry. “I’m going straight to sleep.
-Tom, be sure you wake me up if a steamboat tries to climb over these
-piles.”
-
-This time Tom did not fall asleep at the helm, but the wind gradually
-died away, and the sail hung limp and useless. Jim got out the oars
-without stepping on anybody, and rowed slowly on. In a little while
-they came to the end of the shallow lagoon into which the swell had so
-unexpectedly cast them. A sand-bank stretched from the shore to the
-line of piles, and it was impossible to go any farther. Tom decided to
-make the boat fast to the limb of a willow-tree that projected over
-the water, and to go ashore and sleep on the sand. Neither he nor Jim
-thought it worth while to wake the other boys; so they gathered up
-their blankets, crept quietly out of the boat, and were soon asleep on
-the soft, warm sand. When Harry and Joe awoke at daylight, stiff and
-cramped, they were disposed to be rather indignant at Tom and Jim, who
-were sleeping so comfortably on the sand; but Tom soon convinced them
-that he had acted from the best of motives, and they readily forgave
-him.
-
-Of course breakfast was the first business of the day, and after that
-was finished the boat had to be entirely unloaded before she could be
-lifted over the piles into the channel. For the first time since they
-had started on the cruise the breeze was ahead, but it was so light
-that it was of very little consequence. The sky was cloudy, and the
-day promised to be a cool one; so the boys resolved to take to their
-oars and try, if possible, to reach Albany before night. When the boat
-was loaded, Tom and Jim each took a long oar, and Harry took his usual
-seat in the stern-sheets. They all felt fresh in spite of their night’s
-adventure, and started gayly on their intended long day’s row.
-
-By this time they had found out that, although round tin boxes were
-very well to keep things dry, they are by no means handy to carry in
-a boat. Their shape made it impossible to stow them compactly. Joe,
-who sat at the bow, always had to pick his way over these tin boxes in
-going to or coming from his station; and he was constantly catching
-his foot in the spaces left between the boxes, and falling down on
-them. This smashed in the covers, and tried Joe’s temper sorely. Once
-he sat down so violently on the box which held the sugar, that he
-went completely through the cover, and was fastened in the box as
-securely as a cork in a bottle. He was only released after a great deal
-of work, and just in time to enable the boys to have sugar in their
-coffee at night. Harry resolved that he would never cruise again with
-round boxes, but would have small rubber bags made, in which to put
-everything that required to be kept dry.
-
-The boys took turns at the oars every hour, and rowed steadily until
-noon. They gave themselves an hour for lunch and resting, and then
-resumed their work. Late in the afternoon they came in sight of Albany,
-and went ashore, so as to get their dinner before reaching the city.
-After dinner they again pulled away at the oars, and at about nine
-o’clock they stopped at a lumber-yard on the outskirts of Albany, and,
-creeping in among the lumber, wrapped their blankets around them, and
-dropped asleep, completely worn out, but proud of their long day’s row.
-
-Before sunrise the next morning, Tom was awakened by a stick which
-was thrust into his ribs. Without opening his eyes, he muttered, “You
-quit that, or I’ll get up and pound you!” and immediately dropped
-asleep again. Somebody then kicked him so sharply that he roused
-himself up, and, opening his eyes, was dazzled by the gleam of a
-bull’s-eye lantern. He could not at first imagine where he was; but,
-as he presently found that a big policeman had him by the collar, and
-was calling him “an impudent young thief,” he began to imagine that
-something was wrong.
-
-“I’ve got you this time,” said the policeman, “and the whole gang of
-you. Where did you steal that property in your boat from, you precious
-young river pirate?”
-
-“We’re not river pirates,” replied Tom. “We’re Moral Pirates, and we
-brought those things in the boat with us from New York.”
-
-“Well, I like your cheek!” said the officer; “owning up that you’re
-pirates. Now just you and your gang take everything out of that boat
-and let me see what you’ve got. If any of you try to escape, I’ll put
-a bullet into you. You hear me?”
-
-The other boys had been awakened by the loud voice of the policeman,
-and were staring at him in utter astonishment.
-
-“He thinks we’re river thieves,” said Tom. “Harry, we’ll have to show
-him what we’ve got in the boat, and then he’ll see his mistake.”
-
-Harry eagerly assured the policeman that they had come from New York
-on a pleasure cruise, and had nothing in the boat except provisions
-and stores. “That’s a pretty story,” said the officer. “You can tell
-that to the court. Your boat’s full of junk that you’ve stolen from
-somewhere; and you’d better hand it out mighty quick!”
-
-The boys were thus compelled to unload their boat, while the policeman
-stood over them with his club in one hand and his lantern in the other.
-He was not a stupid man, and he soon perceived that the boys had told
-him the truth; they were not the gang of river thieves for whom he
-had mistaken them. He therefore apologized, in a rough way, and even
-helped the boys repack the boat.
-
-“What I can’t understand,” said he, “is why you boys come here and
-sleep in a lumber-yard, when you might be sleeping at home in your
-beds. Now if you were thieves, you couldn’t get any better lodgings,
-you know; but you’re gentlemen’s sons, and you ought to know better.
-Why don’t you go down to the hotel and live like gentlemen? Where’s the
-fun in being arrested, and taking up my valuable time?”
-
-The boys assured him that they had never enjoyed themselves more than
-they had while on the cruise, and after a little more talk the officer
-turned slowly away.
-
-“By-the-bye,” he exclaimed, suddenly turning back again, “one of you
-told me you were pirates. I ought to take you in after all. I believe
-you’re a lot of boys that have been reading dime novels, and have run
-away from home.”
-
-“I didn’t say we were pirates,” replied Tom. “I said we were Moral
-Pirates. That’s a very different thing.”
-
-“Of course it is,” said Joe. “A Moral Pirate is a sort of missionary,
-you know. I’m afraid you don’t go to Sunday-school, officer, or you’d
-know better.”
-
-The policeman could not quite make up his mind whether Joe was in joke
-or in earnest; but as he could find no real reason for arresting the
-boys, he contented himself with telling them to leave the lumber-yard
-as soon as the sun rose. “And you’d better look out,” he added, “that
-you don’t come across any real river thieves. They’ll make no bones of
-seizing your boat, and knocking you on the head if you make any noise.”
-When he was fairly out of sight, the boys crept back to their shelter
-among the lumber, and coolly went to sleep again. They were so tired
-that neither policemen nor river thieves had any terrors for them.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER X.
-
-
-The policeman did not return, and the boys slept until an hour after
-sunrise. They then rowed down the river to the steamboat landing,
-where they left their boat in charge of a boatman and went to a hotel
-for breakfast. The waiters were rather astonished at the tremendous
-appetites displayed by the four sunburnt boys, and there is no doubt
-that the landlord lost money that morning. After breakfast Harry went
-to the express office, where he found a large water-proof India-rubber
-bag, which the Department had sent in answer to his letter. At the
-post-office were letters from home for all the boys, and a postal order
-for ten dollars from Uncle John for the use of the expedition. Harry
-had no idea that this money would be needed, but it subsequently proved
-to be very useful.
-
-Quite a quantity of stores were bought at Albany, for the voyage up
-the Hudson had lasted longer than any one had supposed it would, and
-the provisions were getting low. No unnecessary time was spent in
-buying these stores, for a fair wind was blowing, and all the boys were
-anxious to take advantage of it. By ten o’clock they were again afloat;
-and soon after noon they reached Troy and entered the canal.
-
-The canal basin was crowded with canal-boats, and to avoid accidents
-the _Whitewing’s_ mast was taken down, and the oars were got out. Harry
-knew that, in order to pass through the locks, it would be necessary to
-pay toll, and to procure an order from the canal authorities directing
-the lockmen to permit the _Whitewing_ to pass. The canal-boatmen, of
-whom he made inquiries, told him where to find the office, which was
-some little distance up the canal. When the office was reached, an
-officer came and inspected the boat, asked a great many questions about
-the cruise up the Hudson, and seemed to be very much interested in the
-expedition. He told the boys that the water was low in the Champlain
-Canal, and that the lockmen might not be willing to open the locks for
-so small a boat; but that they could avoid all dispute by entering the
-locks at the same time with some one of the many canal-boats that were
-on their way north. He charged the _Whitewing_ the enormous sum of
-twenty-five cents for tolls, and gave Harry an important-looking order
-by which the lockmen were directed to allow the skiff _Whitewing_,
-Captain Harry Wilson, to pass through all the locks on the canal.
-
-[Illustration: GOING THROUGH THE LOCK.]
-
-Thanking the pleasant officer, the boys pushed off. After they had
-passed the place where the Champlain Canal branches off from the Erie
-Canal, they were no longer troubled by a crowd of canal-boats, and were
-able to set the sail again. Unluckily, the mast was just a little too
-high to pass under the bridges, and at the first bridge which they met
-they narrowly escaped a capsize--Jim succeeding in getting the mast
-down only just in time to save it from striking the bridge. They had
-hardly set sail again when another bridge came in sight, and they could
-see just beyond it a third bridge. It would never do to stop at every
-bridge and unship the mast; so Harry went on shore, borrowed a saw from
-a cooper’s shop, and sawed six inches off from the top of the mast,
-after which the bridges gave them no more trouble.
-
-The boys were very much interested in passing the first lock. They
-slipped into the lock behind a big canal-boat, which left just room
-enough between its rudder and the gate for the _Whitewing_. When the
-lockmen shut the gate behind the boat, and opened the sluices in the
-upper gate, the water rose slowly and steadily. The sides of the lock
-were so steep and black that the boys felt very much as if they were at
-the bottom of a well; but it was not many minutes before the water had
-risen so high that the upper gates were opened, and the big canal-boat
-and its little follower were released.
-
-Passing through a lock in a small boat, and in company with a
-canal-boat, is not a perfectly safe thing to do; for if the ropes which
-fasten the canal-boat should break--which they sometimes do--the water
-rushing in through the sluices would force the canal-boat against the
-lower gate, and crush the small boat like an egg-shell. It is therefore
-best always to pass through a lock alone, or in company with other
-small boats. The danger, however, is in reality very slight, and very
-few accidents occur in canal locks.
-
-The wind died away before sunset; and the boys having had only a light
-lunch, which they ate on the boat, were glad to go ashore for supper.
-They bought some corn from a farmer, and roasted it before the fire,
-while some nice slices of ham were frying, and the coffee-pot was
-boiling, and so prepared a supper which they greatly enjoyed. The moon
-came up before they had finished the meal, and they felt strongly
-tempted to make another attempt at night-work.
-
-“I’ll tell you what we can do,” exclaimed Harry. “Instead of rowing,
-let’s tow the boat. One fellow can tow while another steers, and the
-rest can sleep in the boat.”
-
-“All right,” said Joe. “I’m willing to be a mule. Only I’d like to know
-where my harness is coming from.”
-
-“We’ve got rope enough for that,” replied Harry. “I’ll take the first
-turn, and tow for an hour, while Joe steers; then I’ll steer for an
-hour, while Joe tows. Then the other watch will take charge of the boat
-for two hours, and Joe and I will sleep.”
-
-“If I’m to sleep on the bottom of that boat,” said Joe, “I want some
-nice sharp stones to sleep on. I’m tired of sleeping on coffee-pots,
-and want a change.”
-
-A long tow-line was soon rigged on Harry’s shoulders in such a way that
-it did not chafe him; a space in the bottom of the boat was cleared of
-coffee-pots and other uncomfortable articles, and a pair of blankets
-was spread on the bottom board, so as to make a comfortable bed,
-which Tom and Jim hastened to occupy. Joe took the yoke-lines in his
-hand, and called to Harry to go ahead. When Harry first tugged at the
-tow-line, the boat seemed very heavy; but as soon as she was in motion,
-Harry found that he could tow her as fast as he could walk, and without
-any difficulty.
-
-Had the locks been open and the canal-boats been out of the way, the
-experiment of towing the _Whitewing_ at night would have been very
-successful. As it happened, the locks were kept closed during the
-night, because the water was low; and the canal-boats, not being able
-to pass the locks, were moored to the tow-path. These boats gave Harry
-and Joe a great deal of trouble. When one of them was met, Harry had to
-unharness himself and toss the rope into the boat, and Joe had to get
-out an oar and scull around the obstacle. This happened so often that
-Tom and Jim got very little sleep; and long before it was time for them
-to resume duty, a lock was reached, and Harry had to call all hands to
-drag the boat around it.
-
-This was a hard piece of work. First, all the heavy things had to be
-taken out of the boat and carried around the lock. Then the boat had
-to be dragged out of the canal on to the tow-path; hauled up a steep
-ascent, and launched above the upper gate. It took a good half-hour to
-pass the first of these closed locks, and when the boat was again ready
-to start, it was time to change the watch.
-
-Tom and Jim had managed to get only a few minutes’ sleep, but Harry and
-Joe could not sleep a single wink. They had not “turned in” for more
-than ten minutes, when another lock was reached. This involved a second
-half-hour of hard work by all hands, and twenty minutes later three
-more locks close together blocked the way. It was foolish to persevere
-in dragging the boat around locks all night long; so, after getting her
-out of the canal on the side opposite to the tow-path, the boys dragged
-her behind some bushes, where the canal-boatmen could not see her at
-daylight. They then spread their rubber blankets on the ground, and
-prepared to sleep through the remaining four or five hours of darkness.
-
-“Boys,” said Joe, suddenly, “does it hurt a fat woman to jump on her?”
-
-“Don’t know,” answered Harry. “What do you ask for?”
-
-“Oh, nothing,” said Joe. “Only when I was jumping from one canal-boat
-to another while I was a mule, I landed awfully heavy on a fat woman
-who was sleeping on deck.”
-
-“What did she do?” asked Harry.
-
-“She didn’t do anything. She just said ‘Go way wid you now, Pathrick,’
-as if she was half asleep and dreaming. Pathrick must be in the habit
-of jumping on her.”
-
-“Well, if she likes it, that’s her business, not yours,” suggested
-Harry. “Go to sleep, do!”
-
-“I am going to sleep; but I don’t think we ought to spend our nights in
-getting run down by steamboats and jumping on strange fat women. I’m
-sure it isn’t right. There, you needn’t throw any more shoes at me! I
-won’t say another word.”
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XI.
-
-
-“Boys,” said Tom, as he was kindling the fire the next morning, “do you
-know what day it is?”
-
-“Saturday, of course,” replied the others.
-
-“You’re wrong; it’s Sunday.”
-
-“It can’t be,” exclaimed Harry.
-
-“But it is,” persisted Tom. “Last night was the sixth night that we’ve
-slept out-doors, and we started on a Monday.”
-
-Tom was right; but it was some time before his companions could
-convince themselves that it was actually Sunday. When they finally
-admitted that it was Sunday morning, they gave up the idea of
-proceeding up the canal, and began to discuss what they had better do.
-
-The boat, which had been drawn out of the water the night before, was
-concealed by a clump of bushes from the canal-boatmen. The boys decided
-to leave it where it was, and to carry the tent and most of their
-baggage to a grove a quarter of a mile distant, where they could pass
-a quiet Sunday. The locks were not yet opened, and no canal-boats were
-stirring, and the boys made their way to the grove at once while their
-movements were unobserved. They were afraid that if they attracted the
-attention of the boatmen to the clump of bushes some one would steal
-the _Whitewing_ while her crew were absent. They had already seen
-enough of the “canalers” to know that they were a wild and lawless set
-of men, and they were not anxious to put the temptation of stealing a
-nice boat in their way.
-
-The grove was a delightful place; and when they had pitched the tent
-under the shadow of the great oak-trees, they were glad of the prospect
-of a good day’s rest. Tom and Harry walked nearly a mile to church in
-the morning, leaving the Sharpe boys to look after the camp, and they
-all slept most of the afternoon.
-
-About dusk, as the fire for cooking supper was blazing briskly, Joe
-returned from a foraging expedition, quite out of breath, and with his
-milk-pail half empty. He said that he had met three tramps on the road,
-which passed through the grove not very far from the camp, and that
-they had snatched a pie from him that he had bought at a farm-house,
-and had chased him for some distance.
-
-He had been badly frightened, as he frankly admitted; but the other
-boys thought that it was a good joke on him. They told him that the
-tramps would track him by the milk that he had spilt, and would
-probably attack the camp and scalp him. They soon forgot the adventure,
-however, with the exception of Tom; who, although he said nothing at
-the time, poured water on the fire as soon as the supper was cooked--an
-act which somewhat astonished the rest. Soon afterward he went into
-the tent for a few moments, and when he returned he was beginning to
-advise Joe not to laugh quite so loud, when the crackling of branches
-was heard in the grove, and three very unpleasant-looking men appeared.
-
-It was fast growing dark, but Joe immediately recognized them as the
-tramps who had stolen his pie. “We’ve come to supper,” said one of
-them. “Let’s see what you’ve got. Give us the bill of fare, sonny, and
-look sharp about it.”
-
-Tom immediately answered that they had eaten their supper, and that
-there was nothing left of it but some coffee. “If you want the coffee,
-take it,” said he. “There isn’t anything else for you.”
-
-“That ain’t a perlite way to treat three gen’lemen as come a long ways
-to call on you,” said the tramp. “We’ll just have to help ourselves,
-and we’ll begin by looking into your tent. P’raps you’ve got a crust of
-bread there, what’ll save a poor starvin’ workin’-man from dyin’ on the
-spot!”
-
-Tom hastily stepped before the tent. “You can’t go into this tent,” he
-said, very quietly; “and you’d better leave this camp and go about your
-business.”
-
-“Just hear him,” said the tramp, addressing his companions. “As if this
-yere identical camp wasn’t our business. Now, boys,” he continued,
-“you’ve got money with you, and you’ve got clothes, and one on you’s
-got a watch, and you’re goin’ to give ’em to three honest hard-workin’
-men, or else you’re goin’ to have your nice little throats cut.”
-
-“Here, boys, quick!” cried Tom, rushing into the tent, where he was
-followed by the other boys before the tramps could stop them. “Here,
-Harry,” he continued, “take the boat-hook. There’s a hatchet for you,
-Jim, and a stick for Joe. Now we’ll see if they can rob us!” So saying,
-he stepped outside the tent with the gun in his hand, followed closely
-by his little army.
-
-The ruffians hesitated when they saw the cool way in which Tom
-confronted them. So they proposed a compromise, as they called it.
-“Look a here,” said the one who had hitherto been the spokesman; “we
-ain’t unreasonable, and we’ll compromise this yere business. You give
-us your money and that chap’s watch, and we’ll let you alone. That’s
-what I call a very handsome offer.”
-
-“We won’t give you a thing,” replied Tom; “and I’ll shoot the first one
-of you that lays a hand on us.”
-
-The tramps consulted for a moment, and then the leader, with a
-frightful oath, ordered Tom to drop that gun instantly.
-
-Tom never said a word, but he cocked both barrels and waited, with his
-eye fixed on the enemy.
-
-Presently the tramps separated a little, the leader remaining where
-he had been standing, and the others moving one to the right and the
-other to the left of the boys. They evidently intended to rush on Tom
-from three directions at once, and so confuse him and prevent him from
-shooting.
-
-“I’ll take the leader and the man on the right,” whispered Tom to
-Harry. “You lay for the other fellow with your boat-hook. I’ve given
-you fair warning,” he continued, addressing the ruffians, “and I’ll
-fire the minute you try to attack us.”
-
-[Illustration: THE FIGHT WITH THE TRAMPS.]
-
-The boys were standing close together in front of the tent, Tom
-being a little in advance of the others. Suddenly the leader of the
-tramps called out, “Now then!” and all three made a rush toward Tom. He
-fired at the tramp in front of him, hitting him in the leg and bringing
-him to the ground; but before he could fire again, the other two were
-upon him.
-
-The boys gallantly stood by Tom. Harry attacked one of the tramps
-with the boat-hook so fiercely that the fellow cried out that he was
-stabbed, and ran away. Meanwhile Tom was struggling with the third
-tramp, who had thrown him down, and was trying to wrench the gun from
-him, while Jim and Joe were hovering around them afraid to strike at
-the tramp for fear of hitting Tom. But now Harry, having driven off his
-antagonist, flew to the help of Tom, and seizing the tramp by his hair,
-and bracing one knee against his back, dragged him backward to the
-ground, and held him there until Tom regained his feet, and, holding
-the muzzle of the gun at the robber’s head, called on him to surrender,
-which the fellow gladly did.
-
-“Get some rope, Jim, and tie him!” cried Tom. “Hold on to his hair,
-Harry, and I’ll blow his brains out if he offers to move.”
-
-The tramp was not at all anxious to part with his brains, and he
-remained perfectly quiet while Jim and Joe tied his feet together, and
-his hands behind his back.
-
-“Now you stand over him with the boat-hook, Harry,” said Tom, “and I’ll
-see to the other fellow.”
-
-The other fellow was, of course, the man who had been shot. Tom lighted
-the lantern, for it was now quite dark, and found that the ruffian had
-been shot in the lower part of his right leg, and had fainted from loss
-of blood. Taking a towel, Tom tore it into strips, and bound up the
-wound, and by the time he had finished the patient became conscious
-again, and begged Tom not to take him to prison.
-
-Now this was precisely what the boys did not want to do, as it would
-probably delay them for several days, and perhaps put an end to their
-cruise. Tom therefore said to the prisoner, whom Harry was guarding,
-that if he would promise to help the wounded man away, and take him
-to see a doctor, he would be released. The tramp gladly accepted the
-offer, and Harry unfastened the rope from his legs and arms, while Tom
-kept his gun in readiness to use it at the first sign of treachery.
-The tramps, however, had quite enough of fighting, and were only too
-anxious to get away. The wounded man was helped to his feet by his
-companion, and the two went slowly off, one half carrying the other,
-and both cursing the coward who had run away. As they hobbled off, Tom
-called out, “I’m sorry I had to hurt you, but I couldn’t help it, you
-know; and if any of you come back here to-night, you’ll find us ready
-for you.”
-
-It was a long time before the boys fell asleep that night, and Tom was
-overwhelmed with praise for his coolness and bravery. Though he felt
-certain that the tramps would not return, he proposed that a sentinel
-should keep guard outside the tent, offering to share that duty with
-Harry, since the other boys were not familiar with guns. So all night
-long Tom and Harry, relieving one another every two hours, marched up
-and down in front of the tent, keeping a sharp watch for robbers, and
-preparing for a desperate fight every time they heard the slightest
-noise.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XII.
-
-
-Though no tramps appeared during the night, the sentinels proved to be
-useful; for as soon as the day began to dawn, Harry, who was on sentry
-duty, called his comrades, and thus they were enabled to get breakfast
-early, and to start before six o’clock. They had to wait half an hour
-for the first lock to be opened, but after that they had no difficulty
-in passing through the other locks. They rowed steadily, taking turns
-at the oars, and occasionally fastening the boat to the stern of a
-canal-boat, which would tow them while they took a short rest. Early
-in the afternoon they reached Fort Edward, where they disembarked; and
-Harry and Tom went in search of a team, which they hired to carry them
-to Warrensburg, on the Schroon branch of the Hudson.
-
-When the teamster drove down to the bank of the canal, Tom and the
-Sharpe boys began to unload the boat. Harry stopped them. “There isn’t
-any use in taking the things out of the boat,” said he. “We can draw
-her out of the canal and put her on the wagon just as she is.”
-
-“Her stern will dip under when we haul her bow out,” said Tom.
-
-“No it won’t,” replied Harry.
-
-“Let’s take the things out of the stern-sheets, anyhow,” urged Tom.
-“All our shoes are there, and we can’t afford to lose them.”
-
-“Nothing will happen to them,” answered Harry, confidently. “It’s my
-boat, and I’m going to haul her out with the things in her.”
-
-Tom said no more, but took hold of the bow of the boat with the others,
-and they began to pull her out of the water. As Tom had prophesied,
-when she was about half-way out her stern dipped under, the water
-poured in, and nearly everything in the after-part of the boat floated
-out. The harm was done now, so the boys hastily dragged the boat up
-the bank, and then began to lament their losses.
-
-There was not a shoe left, except the shoes that Harry and Tom had put
-on when they went in search of the team. The mast and sail and two oars
-were floating on the water, and a quantity of small articles, including
-the tin frying-pans and a tin pail, had shared the fate of the shoes,
-and were lying at the bottom of the canal.
-
-“It was my fault,” said Harry; “and I beg everybody’s pardon. I’ll
-strip and duck for the things till I find them.” So saying, he threw
-off his clothes and sprang into the canal. Joe, who was, next to Harry,
-the best swimmer of the party, followed his example; and a number of
-the villagers and “canalers” collected on the tow-path to watch the
-divers.
-
-The canal was not more than eight feet deep, but the bottom was very
-muddy, and the boys had to feel about in the mud with their feet for
-the lost articles. They were very fortunate, and before long succeeded
-in recovering all the shoes, except one of Joe’s, and several other
-things. Meanwhile three women and half a dozen girls, all of whom lived
-on board the fleet of canal-boats that were lying near by, joined the
-spectators, and seemed to think that the whole business was a capital
-joke. Harry and Joe were now anxious to come out of the water; but they
-could not come ashore while the women and girls were there, so they
-swam some distance up the canal, and crept out behind a barn.
-
-Meanwhile Tom and Jim were busily bailing out the boat, and arranging
-the wet things so that the sun could dry them. They were so busy that
-they forgot all about Harry and Joe. Presently Tom said, “Hark! I think
-I hear somebody calling.”
-
-They listened, and presently they heard a voice in the distance
-calling, “Tom! Jim! boys! somebody! Bring us our clothes!”
-
-“It’s Harry and Joe,” exclaimed Tom. “Where on earth are they?”
-
-[Illustration: HARRY AND JOE IN A TRAP.]
-
-They looked up the canal, and finally discovered a naked arm waving
-frantically from behind a barn that stood near the water. “They
-must be behind that barn,” said Tom. “Why, the mosquitoes will eat ’em
-alive! I’ll take their clothes to them right away.” So saying, Tom
-gathered up the shirts, trousers, and hats of the two unhappy divers,
-and ran with them to their owners. He found Harry and Joe crouched
-behind the barn, chattering with cold and surrounded by clouds of
-eager mosquitoes. “We’ve been here half an hour,” cried Joe, “and the
-mosquitoes would have finished us in another half-hour. I think my
-right leg is nearly gone already.”
-
-“And I know I must have lost a gallon of blood,” said Harry.
-
-“But why on earth did you come here?” asked Tom.
-
-“Because the canal is just lined with women and girls,” replied Joe.
-“They think it’s a circus; but I’m not going to do circus-acting
-without tights.”
-
-The boys hurriedly dressed themselves, and returning to the boat helped
-to put it on the wagon; and with the wet shoes hanging from the
-cart-rungs they started on their ride to Warrensburg. It was a hot and
-tedious ride, and as the wagon had no springs, the boys were bumped so
-terribly that they ached all over. They tried to sing, but the words
-were bumped out of them in the most startling way; and after singing
-one verse of the Star-spangled Banner in this fashion,
-
- “The St-t-tar-spangl-led-led ba-a-an-na-na--”
-
-they gave it up.
-
-About four o’clock they reached Warrensburg, and after getting some
-dry sugar to replace that which had been mixed with canal water, they
-launched the boat, and rowed up the river. They found it a narrow
-stream, with a rapid current and a good depth of water. After their
-tiresome ride the smooth motion of the boat seemed delightful, and they
-were really sorry when they found it was so late that they must camp
-for the night.
-
-They chose a pleasant sandy spot between the river and the edge of a
-thick wood. The opposite bank was also thickly wooded, and they felt as
-if they were in the depths of a wilderness; though, in reality, there
-were houses quite near at hand. They pitched their tent, made a good
-supper--of which they were in need, for they had eaten very little at
-noon--and then “turned in.”
-
-For some reason--perhaps because the mosquitoes had so cruelly
-maltreated him--Joe was not sleepy; and after having lain awake a long
-time while the other boys were sleeping soundly, he began to feel
-lonesome. He heard a great many mysterious noises, as any one who lies
-awake in a tent always does. The melancholy call of the loon sounded
-ghostly, and the sighing of the wind in the trees seemed to him like
-the breathing of huge animals. After awhile he found himself getting
-nervous as well as lonesome, and imagined that he saw shadows of
-strange objects passing in front of the tent. By-and-by he distinctly
-heard the twigs and branches crackling, as somebody or something moved
-through the woods. The noise came nearer, and suddenly it flashed upon
-Joe that a bear was approaching the tent. He crept carefully to the
-opening of the tent, and putting his head out, saw indistinctly a large
-animal moving slowly in the shadow of the bushes only three or four
-rods from the tent.
-
-Joe lost no time in waking up the other boys, cautioning them as he did
-so not to make the least noise. “There’s a bear close by the tent,” he
-whispered. “I’ve been listening to him for a long while, and just now I
-saw him.”
-
-Harry immediately grasped the gun, both barrels of which he had loaded
-before going to sleep. Tom wished that he had the hatchet, but as it
-had been left in the boat, he had no weapon but his penknife. Thus
-armed, the two crept stealthily out of the tent to fight the bear,
-leaving Joe and Jim in a very unhappy state of mind, with nothing to
-defend themselves against the bear, in case he should attack the tent,
-except a tooth-brush and a lantern.
-
-The outline of the animal could be seen, but Tom and Harry could not
-make out which end of it was its head. “You must shoot him just behind
-the shoulder,” whispered Tom. “That’s the only spot where you can kill
-a bear.” Harry said nothing, but watched carefully to see the animal
-move. Presently it threw up either its head or tail--the boys could
-not tell which--and started toward the tent. Harry forgot all about
-shooting at the shoulder, but in his excitement fired at the animal
-generally, without picking out any particular spot in which to plant
-his shot.
-
-The effect of the shot was surprising. The bear set up a tremendous
-bellow, and by the flash of the gun the boys saw their dreaded enemy
-galloping away, with its horns and tail in the air. Tom burst into a
-loud laugh. “Come out, Joe,” he cried. “Your bear’s gone home to be
-milked--that is, if Harry hasn’t mortally wounded her.”
-
-Fortunately, Harry had made a miss; and he found his whole charge
-of shot the next morning in the trunk of a big white birch-tree.
-The innocent cow that Joe had mistaken for a bear was, however, so
-thoroughly frightened that she did not come near the camp again.
-
-“I stick to it that it was a bear!” said Joe, as the boys were wrapping
-themselves in their blankets. “Cows go to roost at sunset. Suppose it
-did bellow: how do you know that bears don’t bellow when they are shot?”
-
-“How about the horns, Joe?” asked Tom.
-
-“There’s horned owls--why shouldn’t there be horned bears? Anyway, I
-believe it was a bear, and I shall stick to it.” And to this day Joe
-believes--or thinks he does--that he had a very narrow escape from a
-ferocious bear on the banks of the Schroon.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XIII.
-
-
-The cruise up the Schroon was a delightful one while it lasted. The
-river was so narrow that the trees on either side frequently met,
-forming a green and shady arch. Although there was a road not far
-from the river, and there were houses and small villages at a little
-distance from its banks, the boys while in their boat saw nothing
-but the water, the trees, and the sky, and felt as far removed from
-civilization as if they were sailing on an African river. They saw
-nothing to shoot, after their adventure with Joe’s bear, and there
-were no signs of fish in the water; but they delighted in the wild and
-solitary river, and were very much disappointed when, at the close of
-the day, they reached a dam so high that it seemed hopeless to try to
-carry the boat around it.
-
-Before camping they walked some distance above the dam, and found that
-the river was completely blocked up with logs, which had been cut in
-the forest above and floated down to the saw-mill. The men at the mill
-said that the boys would find the river choked with logs for a distance
-of nearly three miles, and that a little farther up it became a mere
-brook, too shallow and rapid to be navigated with the _Whitewing_.
-
-It was clear that the cruise on the Schroon had come to an end, and
-that it would be necessary to hire a wagon to take the boat to the
-lake. Having reached this decision, the boys made their camp; and being
-very tired, put off engaging a team until morning.
-
-When morning came, one of the men at the mill came to see them while
-they were at breakfast, and advised them not to go to Schroon Lake. He
-said that the lake was full of houses--by which he meant that there
-were a great many houses along its banks--and that if they were to go
-there they would find neither shooting nor fishing. He urged them to
-go to another lake which they had never heard of before--Brandt Lake.
-It was no farther off than Schroon Lake, and was full of fish. Besides,
-it was a wild mountain lake, with only two or three houses near it. The
-boys thanked him, and gladly accepted his advice. They had supposed
-that Schroon Lake was in the wilderness, and were exceedingly glad
-to find out their mistake in time to select a more attractive place.
-The owner of the saw-mill furnished them with a wagon, and soon after
-breakfast they started for Brandt Lake.
-
-When, after a pleasant ride, they came in sight of the lake, they were
-overjoyed to find how wild and beautiful it was. Steep and thickly
-wooded hills surrounded it, except at the extreme southern point,
-where they launched their boat. It was not more than two miles wide at
-the widest part, and was about five miles in length, and they could
-see but two houses--one on the east, and the other on the west shore.
-They eagerly hoisted the sail, and started up the lake to search
-for a permanent camping-ground; and, after spending the afternoon in
-examining almost the entire line of shore, they selected a little rocky
-island in the upper part of the lake, which seemed made for their
-purpose.
-
-There was a great deal of work to be done, for they intended to stay at
-Brandt Lake for a fortnight. They had to clear away the underbrush, and
-cut down several small trees to make room for the tent. Then a small
-landing-place had to be built of stones and logs, so that the boat
-could approach the island without striking on the sharp rocks which
-surrounded it. Then the stores were all to be taken out of the boat,
-and placed where they would be dry and easy of access. The provisions
-had by this time become nearly exhausted; but the boys had been told
-that they could get milk, eggs, butter, bread, and vegetables at one of
-the houses which was not more than a mile from the camp, so they were
-not troubled to find that of their canned provisions nothing was left
-except a can of peaches.
-
-Of course all this work was not done in one day. On the afternoon of
-their arrival at the lake the boys merely pitched the tent, and then
-went fishing with a view to supper. Fishing with drop-lines from a
-large rock at one end of their little island, they caught perch as
-fast as they could pull them in, good-sized pickerel, and two or
-three cat-fish. That night they ate a supper that would have made a
-boarding-house keeper weep tears of despair, and went to bed rather
-happier than they had ever felt before.
-
-Tom was to row over to the house for milk and other provisions in
-the morning; but when morning came the boat was gone. She had broken
-loose during the night, not having been properly fastened, and had
-floated quietly away. A faint speck was visible on the surface of the
-lake about two miles away, which Harry, who had remarkably good eyes,
-said was the _Whitewing_. Whether he was right or wrong, it was quite
-certain that the boys were imprisoned on the island, with nothing to
-eat but a can of peaches and some coffee and sugar.
-
-The fish, however, were waiting to be caught, and before very long a
-breakfast of fish and of coffee without milk was ready. The boys then
-began to discuss the important question of how they were to get back
-their boat, or to get away from the island.
-
-It was a mile to the shore, and nobody felt able to swim that distance.
-Joe proposed that they fasten one of their shirts to a tall tree, as a
-signal of distress, and then fire the gun every minute. The objection
-to this plan was that the nearest house was out of sight behind a
-little point of land, and that no one would see the signal, or would
-understand why the gun was fired. Then Tom proposed to build a raft,
-on which two boys could paddle after the runaway boat. This was a
-practicable suggestion, and it was at once put into execution.
-
-[Illustration: HARRY SETS OUT IN PURSUIT OF THE BOAT.]
-
-It was hard work to cut down timber enough to build a raft, but by
-perseverance the raft was finished before noon. It consisted of
-four logs laid side by side, and bound together with handkerchiefs,
-shoe-strings, green twigs, and a few strips from one of Harry’s
-shirts, which he said was unnecessarily long. It was covered with two
-or three pieces of flat driftwood; and when it was finished a piece of
-board was found which was shaped with the hatchet into a rude paddle.
-Then Tom and Harry proceeded to embark.
-
-The raft floated Harry very well, but promptly sank when Tom also
-stepped on it. Either more timber must be added to it, or one boy must
-go alone in search of the boat. Harry insisted upon going at once, and
-as the lake was perfectly smooth, and he could swim well, there did not
-seem to be great risk in his making the voyage alone. Bidding the boys
-good-bye, he paddled slowly away, and left his comrades to anxiously
-wait for his return.
-
-It was ticklish work paddling the raft. The logs were fastened together
-so insecurely, owing to the fact that all the rope was in the runaway
-boat, that Harry was in constant fear that they would come apart, and
-was obliged to paddle very carefully to avoid putting any strain on
-the raft. With such a craft speed was out of the question; and after
-an hour of hard work the raft was only half-way between the island and
-the boat. Harry was not easily discouraged, however, and he paddled on,
-knowing that if nothing happened he must reach the boat in course of
-time.
-
-Something did happen. When, after paddling for more than two hours, the
-_Whitewing_ was rather less than a quarter of a mile from the raft,
-Harry missed a stroke with his paddle, and tumbled over. He struck the
-raft with his shoulder, and went through it as easily as if it had been
-fastened together with paper. When he came to the surface again he
-found that the raft had separated into its original logs, and that his
-voyage on it was ended. Luckily the _Whitewing_ was now within swimming
-distance, so he struck out for her, and finally crept into her over the
-stern, so much exhausted that he had to lie down and rest before taking
-to the oars. Had the raft gone to pieces half an hour sooner he would
-have been in a dangerous position; for it is doubtful if he could have
-clung to one of the logs long enough to drift to the shore without
-becoming totally exhausted.
-
-The boys on the island did not witness the end of Harry’s raft, for it
-was too far away when the accident occurred for them to see anything
-but a little black dot on the water. They became, however, very
-anxious about him as the hours went by and he did not come back. Tom
-was especially uneasy, and blamed himself for permitting Harry to go
-alone. He thought of making another raft and going in search of Harry;
-but there were no more strings with which to fasten logs together,
-and he did not quite like to tear up his clothes and use them for
-that purpose. He did, however, resolve that, if Harry did not come in
-sight within another hour, he would take a small log and, putting it
-under his arms, try to swim to the main-land and borrow a boat, if one
-could be found, in which to search for his comrade. He was spared this
-hazardous experiment; for toward the end of the afternoon Harry and
-the _Whitewing_ came in sight, and were welcomed with a tremendous
-cheer.
-
-Tom took the boat and went for provisions, and when he returned
-the _Whitewing_ was not only dragged on shore, but fastened to two
-different trees with two distinct ropes. The boys were determined that
-she should not escape again; and when Joe proposed that somebody should
-sit up with her all night, so that she could not cut the ropes and run
-away, Tom seriously considered the proposal. The next day a snug little
-dock was built, in which she seemed quite contented, and from which she
-could not escape without climbing over a stone breakwater--a feat of
-which there was no reason to believe that she was capable.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XIV.
-
-
-The boys had been on their island for more than a week when they
-resolved to make an excursion to Schroon, which was the nearest
-village, in order to get some sugar, coffee, and other necessaries.
-Schroon Lake, or rather the lower end of it, was not more than five
-miles from Brandt Lake; but there was a range of high hills between the
-two, and the village of Schroon was situated at the head of the lake,
-which was nearly ten miles in length. A long and tiresome journey was,
-therefore, before them, and they ought to have started early in the
-morning; but they did not start until nearly eleven o’clock. Harry,
-Tom, and Joe were to go to Schroon together, and Jim was to stay at the
-island until six o’clock, when he was to row over to the west shore
-and bring the others back to the camp.
-
-[Illustration: BIDDING JIM GOOD-BYE.]
-
-When they bade good-bye to Jim, the three other boys assured him that
-they would certainly be back as early as six o’clock, and warned him
-not to fail to meet them with the boat. They then started to cross
-the hills, following a foot-path, that was so little used that it
-was hardly visible. Unfortunately the path led through a thicket of
-raspberry bushes, and the fruit was so tempting that the boys lost a
-good deal of time by stopping to gather it. After a tiresome tramp
-under the mid-day sun they reached the lower end of Schroon Lake, where
-they hired a crank little row-boat, and rowed up to Schroon. There was
-a fresh northerly breeze which delayed them; and the spray from the bow
-of the boat sprinkled them, so that they were uncomfortably wet when
-they reached the village. By this time they were very hungry as well
-as tired, and so they went to the hotel for dinner. It was half-past
-six o’clock when they started to row down the lake, and several men
-who saw them warned them that they were running a good deal of risk in
-attempting to return at so late an hour.
-
-The trip down the lake was certainly a rather foolhardy one; for there
-was a good deal of wind and sea, and long before they reached the
-landing-place it was quite dark. But the boys were anxious to get back
-to their camp, and for the first time during the cruise they acted
-somewhat recklessly. However, they met with no accident; and when they
-had returned the boat to its owner, they set out to cross the hills.
-
-The path was not easy to find in the daylight, and it was next to
-impossible to find it in the night. A dozen times the boys lost
-themselves, and were compelled to depend entirely upon the stars to
-direct their course. The woods had been all cleared away for a space
-of a mile or a mile and a half wide between the two lakes, except just
-along the shore of Brandt Lake; so that it was not absolutely necessary
-for them to keep in the path, as it would have been had they been
-passing through a thick forest. Still it was not pleasant to lose the
-path, and stumble over stones and stumps, and of course it made the
-journey longer. They must have walked at least seven or eight miles on
-their way back before they finally reached their own lake at midnight,
-at the point where they expected to find Jim waiting for them.
-
-Neither Jim nor the boat was there. He had waited until ten o’clock,
-and then, making up his mind that they had decided to spend the night
-at Schroon, he rowed back to the island, and went calmly to bed. An
-hour later a dense fog settled over the lake; and when the tired boys
-reached the shore they could see but a few yards in front of their eyes.
-
-It was a terrible disappointment, but Harry tried to be cheerful. “We
-shall have to stay here to-night, boys,” said he; “but we will build a
-good fire and keep warm.” Tom said that he thought that was the best
-thing to do, for without a fire they would suffer severely from the
-cold, wet fog, and he asked Harry if he had any matches. Harry had
-none, Joe had none, and Tom had none; so the plan of building a fire
-came to nothing.
-
-The cold gradually chilled them as they stood talking over their
-adventure, and their teeth began to chatter. Joe said he wished he
-could get hold of Jim for about five minutes, so that he could warm
-himself up by convincing him that he ought not to have taken the
-boat back to the island. Harry said nothing; but he was wondering
-whether he would freeze to death in the fog, and tried to remember how
-travellers overtaken by the snow on the Alps contrive to fight off the
-terrible drowsiness that steals over them when they are freezing. Tom
-was more practical. He did not expect to freeze in July, although he
-was miserably cold; and he did not want to punish Jim for a mistake
-of judgment. He knew that the house where they were accustomed to get
-milk was not far off, and that a boat usually lay on the shore near
-the house; so he proposed to Harry and Joe to borrow the boat and make
-their way into the camp.
-
-“If we go to that house at this time of night, we shall get shot,”
-remarked Harry. “The man is an ugly-tempered chap, and I heard him say
-the other day that if he ever heard anything prowling around the house
-at night, he always fired at it.”
-
-“Then we won’t ask him for his boat: we’ll borrow it without leave, and
-Jim can bring it back in the morning,” replied Tom.
-
-“This is nice conduct for Moral Pirates,” said Joe. “Capturing a vessel
-at night is real piracy, and when Jim takes the boat back the man
-will be sure to shoot him. I’m sorry for Jim; but I hope it will be
-a warning to him not to leave his friends in such a fix that they’ve
-either got to borrow a boat without leave, or freeze.”
-
-They made their way stealthily and with great difficulty to the place
-where the boat lay. It was high and dry on the beach, and though the
-fog hid the house where the owner of the boat lived, the boys knew that
-it was very near. They launched the boat with the utmost caution, lest
-any noise should awaken the bad-tempered man with the shotgun. They
-had it almost launched, when Harry’s foot slipped on a wet stone, and
-he fell with a dismal crash, clinging to the boat, and dragging Tom and
-Joe down with him.
-
-It was very certain that if anything could wake the owner of the boat,
-he must be awake by this time; so the boys sprang up, and shoving
-the boat into the water regardless of the noise, seized the oars,
-and rowed away into the fog. When they had gained what they thought
-a safe distance from the shore they ceased rowing, and congratulated
-themselves that they were all right at last. To be sure, Harry had
-scraped his ankle badly; Tom had forgotten the coffee, and left it on
-the shore; and Joe had put the sugar in the bottom of the leaky boat,
-where it was rapidly dissolving into sirup; but they were once more
-afloat, and expected to reach their comfortable camp within the next
-twenty minutes.
-
-There was not a particle of air stirring, and not a star was visible,
-so they had absolutely nothing to steer by. They could not even hear
-the sound of the water which ordinarily lapped the shore. Still they
-were not discouraged. Harry thought he knew which way the camp lay, and
-so he and Tom rowed in what they imagined was the right direction.
-
-They rowed for two hours without finding the island, and without
-reaching the shore. They could not understand it. The lake seemed to
-have grown in the night, and to have reached the size of Lake Ontario.
-They knew that by daylight they could row across it at its widest part
-in less than an hour, but now it seemed impossible to find any shore.
-Joe had just suggested that they had made a mistake in coming back from
-Schroon, and had walked all the way to Lake Champlain, on which they
-were now rowing, when the bow of the boat struck the shore.
-
-It was some consolation to know that the lake actually had a shore;
-but they could not tell what part of the shore they had reached. They
-pushed off again, and resumed their hopeless search for the camp. A
-new trouble now harassed them. From seeming to have no shore at all,
-the lake now seemed to have shrunk to a mere mud-puddle. No matter
-in what direction they rowed, they would strike the shore within ten
-minutes, and always at a different place. Joe said that he had never
-dreamed that so much shore and so little lake could be put together.
-
-Toward morning Harry and Tom became too tired to row, and they lay down
-in the bottom of the wet boat, and tried to keep warm by lying close
-to each other. Joe took the oars, and tried to row without hitting the
-shore; but he had hardly dipped his oars when the bow grated on the
-pebbles. He promptly gave up the attempt, and making the boat fast to a
-tree, joined Tom and Harry, and shared their misery.
-
-They were much too cold and wretched to sleep, but they managed to
-keep from growing positively stiff with cold. The sun rose, but it
-did not for a long time make any impression on the fog. All at once,
-about seven o’clock, the fog vanished; and the boys found themselves
-in a little bay near the extreme northerly part of the lake. They had
-been rowing across this little bay, first in one direction and then
-in another, during all those miserable hours when they found such an
-unaccountable quantity of shore.
-
-Of course they rowed down to the camp, where they found Jim still
-sleeping soundly, with a contented, happy look that was awfully
-exasperating. They woke him up, and scolded him with all the strength
-they had left, and then, putting on dry clothes, “turned in,” and slept
-all day. Jim towed the borrowed boat back, but was not shot; and the
-boys afterward said that, on the whole, they were rather glad that he
-still lived, and that they would mercifully forgive him.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER XV.
-
-
-There was only one fault to be found with Brandt Lake; there was hardly
-anything to shoot in its vicinity. Occasionally a deer could be found;
-but at the season of the year when the boys were at the lake it was
-contrary to law to kill deer. It was known that there were bears in
-that part of the country as well as lynxes--or catamounts, as they
-are generally called; but they were so scarce that no one thought of
-hunting them. Harry did succeed in shooting three pigeons and a quail,
-and Tom shot a gray squirrel; but the bears, deer, catamounts, and
-ducks that they had expected to shoot did not show themselves.
-
-On the other hand, they had any quantity of fishing. Perch and cat-fish
-swarmed all around the island; and large pickerel, some of them
-weighing six or eight pounds, could be caught by trolling. Two miles
-farther north was another lake that was full of trout, and the boys
-visited it several times, and found out how delicious a trout is when
-it is cooked within half an hour after it is taken out of the water.
-In fact they lived principally upon fish, and became so dainty that
-they would not condescend to cook any but the choicest trout, and the
-plumpest cat-fish and pickerel.
-
-It must be confessed that there was a good deal of monotony in their
-daily life. In the morning somebody went for milk, after which
-breakfast was cooked and eaten. Then one of the boys would take the gun
-and tramp through the woods in the hope of finding something to shoot,
-while the others would either go fishing or lie in the shade. Once
-they devoted a whole day to circumnavigating the lake in the boat, and
-another day a long rain-storm kept them inside of the tent most of the
-time. With these exceptions one day was remarkably like another; and at
-the end of two weeks they began to grow a little tired of camping, and
-to remember that there were ways of enjoying themselves at home.
-
-Their final departure from their island camp was caused by an accident.
-They had decided to row to the southern end of the lake and engage
-a team to meet them the following week and to carry them to Glenn’s
-Falls, where they intended to ship the boat on board a canal-boat bound
-for New York, and to return home by rail. To avoid the heat of the sun,
-they started down the lake immediately after breakfast, and forgot to
-put out the fire before they left the island.
-
-After they had rowed at least a mile, Tom, who sat facing the stern,
-noticed a light wreath of smoke rising from the island, and remarked,
-“Our fire is burning yet. We ought not to have gone off and left it.”
-
-Harry looked back, and saw that the cloud of smoke was rapidly
-increasing.
-
-“It’s not the fire that’s making all that smoke!” he exclaimed.
-
-“What is it, then?” asked Tom.
-
-“Perhaps it’s water,” said Joe. “I always thought that where there was
-smoke there must be fire; but Harry says it isn’t fire.”
-
-“I mean,” continued Harry, “that we didn’t leave fire enough to make so
-much smoke. It must have spread and caught something.”
-
-“Caught the tent, most likely,” said Tom. “Let’s row back right away
-and put it out.”
-
-“What’s the use?” interrupted Jim. “That tent is as dry as tinder, and
-will burn up before we can get half-way there.”
-
-“We must get back as soon as we can,” cried Harry. “All our things are
-in the tent. Row your best, boys, and we may save them yet.”
-
-The boat was quickly turned, and headed toward the camp. The fire was
-rapidly increasing, and it was apparent that the dry underbrush must
-have caught; in which case the fire would soon fasten on the trees, and
-sweep over the whole of the little island.
-
-[Illustration: THE EXPLOSION IN CAMP.]
-
-“There’s one reason why I’m not particularly anxious to help put that
-fire out,” Joe remarked, as they approached the island, and could see
-that a really alarming fire was in progress.
-
-“What’s that?” asked Harry.
-
-“As near as I can calculate, there must be about two pounds--”
-
-He was interrupted by a loud report from the island, and a shower of
-pebbles, sticks, and small articles--among which a shoe and a tin pail
-were recognized--shot into the air.
-
---“Of powder,” Joe continued, “in the flask. I thought it would blow
-up, and now that it’s all gone I don’t mind landing on the island.”
-
-“Everything must be ruined!” exclaimed Jim.
-
-“Lucky for us that we put on our shoes this morning,” Tom remarked, as
-he rowed steadily on. “That must have been one of my other pair that
-just went up. I remember I put them in the corner of the tent close by
-the powder.”
-
-When they reached the island they could not at first land, on account
-of the heat of the flames; but they could plainly see that the tent and
-everything in it had been totally destroyed. After waiting for half an
-hour the fire burnt itself out, so that they could approach their dock
-and land on the smoking ash heap that an hour before had been such a
-beautiful, shady spot. There was hardly anything left that was of any
-use. A tin pan, a fork, and the hatchet were found uninjured; but all
-their clothing and other stores were either burnt to ashes or so badly
-scorched as to be useless. Quite overwhelmed by their disaster, the
-boys sat down and looked at one another.
-
-“We’ve got to go home now, whether we want to or not,” Harry said, as
-he poked the ashes idly with a stick.
-
-“Well, we meant to go home in a few days anyway,” said Tom; “so the
-fire hasn’t got very much the better of us.”
-
-“But I hate to have everything spoiled, and to have to go in this sort
-of way. Our tin pans and fishing-tackle aren’t worth much, but all our
-spare clothes have gone.”
-
-“You’ve got your uncle’s gun in the boat, so that’s all right,”
-suggested Tom, encouragingly. “As long as the gun and the boat are
-safe, we needn’t mind about a few flannel shirts and things.”
-
-“But it’s such a pity to be driven away when we were having such a
-lovely time,” continued Harry.
-
-“That’s rubbish, Harry,” said Joe. “We were all beginning to get tired
-of camping out. I think it’s jolly to have the cruise end this way,
-with a lot of fireworks. It’s like the transformation scene at the
-theatre. Besides, it saves us the trouble of carrying a whole lot of
-things back with us.”
-
-“The thing to do now,” remarked Tom, “is to row right down to the
-outlet, and get a team to take us to Glenn’s Falls this afternoon. We
-can’t sleep here, unless we build a hut, and then we wouldn’t have a
-blanket to cover us. Don’t let’s waste any more time talking about it.”
-
-“That’s so! Take your places in the boat, boys, and we’ll start for
-home.” So saying, Harry led the way to the boat, and in a few moments
-the _Whitewing_ was homeward bound.
-
-The boys were lucky enough to find a man who engaged to take them to
-Glenn’s Falls in time to catch the afternoon train for Albany. They
-stopped at the Falls only long enough to see the _Whitewing_ safely
-on board a canal-boat, and they reached Albany in time to go down the
-river on the night-boat.
-
-After a supper that filled the colored waiters with astonishment and
-horror, the boys selected arm-chairs on the forward deck, and began
-to talk over the cruise. They all agreed that they had had a splendid
-time, in spite of hard work and frequent wettings.
-
-“We’ll go on another cruise next summer, sure,” said Harry. “Where
-shall we go?”
-
-Tom was the first to reply. Said he, “I’ve been thinking that we can do
-better than we did this time.”
-
-“How so?” asked the other boys.
-
-“The _Whitewing_ is an awfully nice boat,” Tom continued, “but she is
-too small. We ought to have a boat that we can sleep in comfortably,
-and without getting wet every night.”
-
-“But, then,” Harry suggested, “you couldn’t drag a bigger boat round a
-dam.”
-
-“We can’t drag the _Whitewing_ round much of a dam. She’s too big to be
-handled on land, and too little to be comfortable. Now, here’s my plan.”
-
-“Let’s have it,” cried the other boys.
-
-“We can hire a cat-boat about twenty feet long, and she’ll be big
-enough, so that we can rig up a canvas cabin at night. We can anchor
-her, and sleep on board her every night. We can carry mattresses, so we
-needn’t sleep on stones and stumps--”
-
---“And coffee-pots,” interrupted Joe.
-
---“And we can take lots of things, and live comfortably. We can sail
-instead of rowing; and though I like to row as well as the next fellow,
-we’ve had a little too much of that. Now we’ll get a cat-boat next
-summer, and we’ll cruise from New York Bay to Montauk Point. We can
-go all the way through the bays on the south side, and there are only
-three places where we will have to get a team of horses to drag the
-boat across a little bit of flat meadow. I know all about it, for I
-studied it out on the map one day. What do you say for that for a
-cruise?”
-
-“I’ll go,” said Harry.
-
-“And I’ll go,” said Jim.
-
-“Hurrah for the cat-boat!” said Joe. “We can be twice as moral and
-piratical in a sail-boat as we can in a row-boat, even if it is the
-dear little _Whitewing_.”
-
-
-THE END.
-
-
-
-
-TRANSCRIBER’S NOTES:
-
-
- Italicized text is surrounded by underscores: _italics_.
-
- Obvious typographical errors have been corrected.
-
- Inconsistencies in hyphenation have been standardized.
-
- Archaic or variant spelling has been retained.
-
- The cover image for this eBook was created by the transcriber using
- the original cover as the background and is entered into the
- public domain.
-
-*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE MORAL PIRATES ***
-
-Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will
-be renamed.
-
-Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright
-law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works,
-so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the
-United States without permission and without paying copyright
-royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part
-of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm
-concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark,
-and may not be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following
-the terms of the trademark license, including paying royalties for use
-of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for
-copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is very
-easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation
-of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project
-Gutenberg eBooks may be modified and printed and given away--you may
-do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected
-by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark
-license, especially commercial redistribution.
-
-START: FULL LICENSE
-
-THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
-PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
-
-To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
-distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
-(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
-Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full
-Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at
-www.gutenberg.org/license.
-
-Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic works
-
-1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
-electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
-and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
-(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all
-the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or
-destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your
-possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a
-Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound
-by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the
-person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph
-1.E.8.
-
-1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be
-used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
-agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few
-things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
-even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See
-paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this
-agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm
-electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below.
-
-1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the
-Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection
-of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual
-works in the collection are in the public domain in the United
-States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the
-United States and you are located in the United States, we do not
-claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing,
-displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as
-all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope
-that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting
-free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm
-works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the
-Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily
-comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the
-same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when
-you share it without charge with others.
-
-1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
-what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are
-in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States,
-check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this
-agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing,
-distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any
-other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no
-representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any
-country other than the United States.
-
-1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
-
-1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other
-immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear
-prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work
-on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the
-phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed,
-performed, viewed, copied or distributed:
-
- This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and
- most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no
- restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it
- under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this
- eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the
- United States, you will have to check the laws of the country where
- you are located before using this eBook.
-
-1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is
-derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not
-contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the
-copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in
-the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are
-redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project
-Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply
-either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or
-obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm
-trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
-
-1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
-with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
-must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any
-additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms
-will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works
-posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the
-beginning of this work.
-
-1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
-License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
-work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
-
-1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
-electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
-prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
-active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
-Gutenberg-tm License.
-
-1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
-compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including
-any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access
-to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format
-other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official
-version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm website
-(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense
-to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means
-of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain
-Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the
-full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
-
-1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
-performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
-unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
-
-1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
-access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
-provided that:
-
-* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
- the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
- you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed
- to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has
- agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project
- Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid
- within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are
- legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty
- payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project
- Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in
- Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg
- Literary Archive Foundation."
-
-* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
- you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
- does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
- License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all
- copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue
- all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm
- works.
-
-* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of
- any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
- electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of
- receipt of the work.
-
-* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
- distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
-
-1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than
-are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing
-from the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of
-the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the Foundation as set
-forth in Section 3 below.
-
-1.F.
-
-1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
-effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
-works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project
-Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm
-electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may
-contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate
-or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other
-intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or
-other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or
-cannot be read by your equipment.
-
-1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
-of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
-Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
-Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
-liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
-fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
-LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
-PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
-TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
-LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
-INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
-DAMAGE.
-
-1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
-defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
-receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
-written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
-received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium
-with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you
-with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in
-lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person
-or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second
-opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If
-the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing
-without further opportunities to fix the problem.
-
-1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
-in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO
-OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
-LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
-
-1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
-warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of
-damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement
-violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the
-agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or
-limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or
-unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the
-remaining provisions.
-
-1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
-trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
-providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in
-accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the
-production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm
-electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses,
-including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of
-the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this
-or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or
-additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any
-Defect you cause.
-
-Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
-
-Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
-electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of
-computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It
-exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations
-from people in all walks of life.
-
-Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
-assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
-goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
-remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project
-Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
-and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future
-generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see
-Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at
-www.gutenberg.org
-
-Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation
-
-The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit
-501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
-state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
-Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
-number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by
-U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
-
-The Foundation's business office is located at 809 North 1500 West,
-Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up
-to date contact information can be found at the Foundation's website
-and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact
-
-Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
-Literary Archive Foundation
-
-Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without
-widespread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
-increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
-freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest
-array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations
-($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
-status with the IRS.
-
-The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
-charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
-States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
-considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
-with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations
-where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND
-DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular
-state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate
-
-While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
-have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
-against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
-approach us with offers to donate.
-
-International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
-any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
-outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
-
-Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation
-methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other
-ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To
-donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate
-
-Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
-
-Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project
-Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be
-freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and
-distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of
-volunteer support.
-
-Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
-editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in
-the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not
-necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper
-edition.
-
-Most people start at our website which has the main PG search
-facility: www.gutenberg.org
-
-This website includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
-including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
-subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
diff --git a/old/68732-0.zip b/old/68732-0.zip
deleted file mode 100644
index 13b119d..0000000
--- a/old/68732-0.zip
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/68732-h.zip b/old/68732-h.zip
deleted file mode 100644
index 23b5478..0000000
--- a/old/68732-h.zip
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/68732-h/68732-h.htm b/old/68732-h/68732-h.htm
deleted file mode 100644
index 40c80f3..0000000
--- a/old/68732-h/68732-h.htm
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,4118 +0,0 @@
-<!DOCTYPE html>
-<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:lang="en" lang="en">
-<head>
- <meta charset="UTF-8" />
- <title>
- The moral pirates, by W. L. Alden—A Project Gutenberg eBook
- </title>
- <link rel="icon" href="images/cover.jpg" type="image/x-cover" />
- <style> /* <![CDATA[ */
-
-body {
- margin-left: 10%;
- margin-right: 10%;
-}
-
- h1,h2 {
- text-align: center;
- clear: both;
-}
-
-p {
- margin-top: .51em;
- text-align: justify;
- margin-bottom: .49em;
-}
-
-hr {
- width: 33%;
- margin-top: 2em;
- margin-bottom: 2em;
- margin-left: 33.5%;
- margin-right: 33.5%;
- clear: both;
-}
-
-hr.tiny {width: 10%; margin-left: 45%; margin-right: 45%;}
-hr.chap {width: 65%; margin-left: 17.5%; margin-right: 17.5%;}
-@media print { hr.chap {display: none; visibility: hidden;} }
-
-div.chapter {page-break-before: always;}
-h2.nobreak {page-break-before: avoid;}
-
-table {
- margin-left: auto;
- margin-right: auto;
-}
-
-.tdr {text-align: right; vertical-align: bottom;}
-
-.pagenum {
- position: absolute;
- left: 92%;
- font-size: smaller;
- text-align: right;
- font-style: normal;
- font-weight: normal;
- font-variant: normal;
- text-indent: 0;
-}
-
-.blockquot {
- margin-left: 17.5%;
- margin-right: 17.5%;
-}
-
-.x-ebookmaker .blockquot {
- margin-left: 7.5%;
- margin-right: 7.5%;
-}
-
-.center {text-align: center;}
-
-.right {text-align: right;}
-
-.smcap {font-variant: small-caps;}
-
-.ph1 {text-align: center; font-size: large; font-weight: bold;}
-.ph2 {text-align: center; font-size: xx-large; font-weight: bold;}
-
-div.titlepage {text-align: center; page-break-before: always; page-break-after: always;}
-div.titlepage p {text-align: center; font-weight: bold; line-height: 1.5; margin-top: 2em;}
-
-.large {font-size: 125%;}
-
-.caption {font-weight: bold; text-align: center;}
-
-.gap {padding-left: 3em;}
-.gap2 {padding-left: 8em;}
-.gap3 {padding-left: 2em;}
-
-.x-ebookmaker .hide {display: none; visibility: hidden;}
-
-img.drop-cap
-{
- float: left;
- margin: 0 0.5em 0 0;
-}
-
-p.drop-cap:first-letter
-{
- color: transparent;
- visibility: hidden;
- margin-left: -0.9em;
-}
-
-.x-ebookmaker img.drop-cap
-{
- display: none;
-}
-
-.x-ebookmaker p.drop-cap:first-letter
-{
- color: inherit;
- visibility: visible;
- margin-left: 0;
-}
-
-.figcenter {
- margin: auto;
- text-align: center;
- page-break-inside: avoid;
- max-width: 100%;
-}
-
-.transnote {background-color: #E6E6FA;
- color: black;
- font-size:smaller;
- margin-left: 17.5%;
- margin-right: 17.5%;
- padding: 1em;
- margin-bottom: 1em;
- font-family:sans-serif, serif; }
-
- /* ]]> */ </style>
-</head>
-<body>
-<p style='text-align:center; font-size:1.2em; font-weight:bold'>The Project Gutenberg eBook of The moral pirates, by W. L. Alden</p>
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and
-most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions
-whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms
-of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online
-at <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a>. If you
-are not located in the United States, you will have to check the laws of the
-country where you are located before using this eBook.
-</div>
-
-<p style='display:block; margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:1em; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em'>Title: The moral pirates</p>
-<p style='display:block; margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:0; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em'>Author: W. L. Alden</p>
-<p style='display:block; margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:0; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em'>Illustrator: A. B. Frost</p>
-<p style='display:block; text-indent:0; margin:1em 0'>Release Date: August 12, 2022 [eBook #68732]</p>
-<p style='display:block; text-indent:0; margin:1em 0'>Language: English</p>
- <p style='display:block; margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:0; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em; text-align:left'>Produced by: Richard Hulse, David E. Brown, and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net (This file was produced from images generously made available by The Internet Archive/American Libraries.)</p>
-<div style='margin-top:2em; margin-bottom:4em'>*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE MORAL PIRATES ***</div>
-
-<div class="figcenter hide"><img src="images/coversmall.jpg" width="450" alt="" /></div>
-
-<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" />
-
-<div class="chapter">
-<span class="pagenum" id="Page_0"></span>
-<div class="figcenter"><img src="images/i_002.jpg" alt="THE TIDE AGAINST THEM" /></div>
-
-<p class="caption"><span class="gap2">THE TIDE AGAINST THEM. </span><span class="gap"> [<i>Page <a href="#Page_23">23</a>.</i></span></p>
-</div>
-
-<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" />
-<div class="chapter">
-<div class="figcenter"><img src="images/i_titlepage.jpg" alt="" /></div>
-</div>
-<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" />
-
-<div class="titlepage">
-<h1>
-THE MORAL PIRATES</h1>
-
-<p>BY<br />
-<span class="large">W. L. ALDEN</span></p>
-
-<p><i>ILLUSTRATED</i></p>
-
-<p>NEW YORK<br />
-HARPER &amp; BROTHERS, FRANKLIN SQUARE<br />
-1881</p>
-</div>
-<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" />
-
-<div class="chapter">
-<p class="center">
-Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1880, by<br />
-<br />
-HARPER &amp; BROTHERS,<br />
-<br />
-In the Office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington.<br />
-<br />
-<br />
-<i>All rights reserved.</i></p>
-</div>
-
-<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" />
-
-<div class="chapter">
-<h2 class="nobreak">ILLUSTRATIONS.</h2>
-</div>
-
-<table>
-<tr><td>THE TIDE AGAINST THEM</td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_0"> <i>Frontispiece</i></a></td></tr>
-
-<tr><td>THE “WHITEWING” AT HARLEM</td><td class="tdr"> <i>faces page</i> &#160; &#160; <a href="#13a">13</a></td></tr>
-
-<tr><td>HARRY SWIMS FOR THE EDDY</td><td class="tdr"> “ <span class="gap3"> “</span> &#160; &#160; &#160; <a href="#27a">27</a></td></tr>
-
-<tr><td>“IF YOU WANT TO DIG, DIG. I DON’T INTEND TO DO ANY<br /> &#160; &#160; MORE DIGGING”&#160; &#160;</td><td class="tdr"> “<span class="gap3"> “</span> &#160; &#160; &#160; <a href="#43a">43</a></td></tr>
-
-<tr><td>THE SOUP EXPLOSION</td><td class="tdr"> “<span class="gap3"> “</span> &#160; &#160; &#160; <a href="#53a">53</a></td></tr>
-
-<tr><td>THE BOYS BUILT A ROARING FIRE ON A LARGE FLAT<br /> &#160; &#160; ROCK</td><td class="tdr"> “<span class="gap3"> “</span> &#160; &#160; &#160; <a href="#58a">58</a></td></tr>
-
-<tr><td>JOE IS CAUGHT</td><td class="tdr"> “<span class="gap3"> “</span> &#160; &#160; &#160; <a href="#64a">64</a></td></tr>
-
-<tr><td>MUMBLE-THE-PEG</td><td class="tdr"> “<span class="gap3"> “</span> &#160; &#160; &#160; <a href="#72a">72</a></td></tr>
-
-<tr><td>LIFTING THE BOAT OVER THE PILES</td><td class="tdr"> “<span class="gap3"> “</span> &#160; &#160; &#160; <a href="#81a">81</a></td></tr>
-
-<tr><td>GOING THROUGH THE LOCK</td><td class="tdr"> “<span class="gap3"> “</span> &#160; &#160; &#160; <a href="#93a">93</a></td></tr>
-
-<tr><td>THE FIGHT WITH THE TRAMPS</td><td class="tdr"> “<span class="gap3"> “</span> &#160; &#160; <a href="#104a">104</a></td></tr>
-
-<tr><td>HARRY AND JOE IN A TRAP</td><td class="tdr"> “<span class="gap3"> “</span> &#160; &#160; <a href="#112a">112</a></td></tr>
-
-<tr><td>HARRY SETS OUT IN PURSUIT OF THE BOAT</td><td class="tdr"> “<span class="gap3"> “</span> &#160; &#160; <a href="#124a">124</a></td></tr>
-
-<tr><td>BIDDING JIM GOOD-BYE</td><td class="tdr"> “<span class="gap3"> “</span> &#160; &#160; <a href="#130a">130</a></td></tr>
-
-<tr><td>THE EXPLOSION IN CAMP</td><td class="tdr"> “<span class="gap3"> “</span> &#160; &#160; <a href="#143a">143</a></td></tr>
-</table>
-
-<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" />
-
-<div class="chapter">
-<span class="pagenum" id="Page_7">[7]</span>
-
-<p class="ph2">THE MORAL PIRATES.</p>
-
-<hr class="tiny" />
-<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER I.</h2>
-</div>
-
-<div>
- <img class="drop-cap" src="images/i_007.jpg" width="75" height="75" alt="T" />
-</div>
-
-<p class="drop-cap">THE truth is, John,” said Mr. Wilson to his
-brother, “I am troubled about my boy.
-Here it is the first of July, and he can’t go
-back to school until the middle of September. He
-will be idle all that time, and I’m afraid he’ll get
-into mischief. Now, the other day I found him reading
-a wretched story about pirates. Why should a
-son of mine care to read about pirates?”</p>
-
-<p>“Because he’s a boy. All boys like piratical stories.
-I know, when I was a boy, I thought that if I
-could be either a pirate or a stage-driver I should be
-perfectly happy. Of course you don’t want Harry<span class="pagenum" id="Page_8">[8]</span>
-to read rubbish; but it doesn’t follow because a boy
-reads stories about piracy, that he wants to commit
-murder and robbery. I didn’t want to kill anybody:
-I wanted to be a moral and benevolent pirate.
-But here comes Harry across the lawn. What
-will you give me if I will find something for him to
-do this summer that will make him forget all about
-piracy?”</p>
-
-<p>“I only wish you would. Tell me what your
-plan is.”</p>
-
-<p>“Come here a minute, Harry,” said Uncle John.
-“Now own up; do you like books about pirates?”</p>
-
-<p>“Well, yes, uncle, I do.”</p>
-
-<p>“So did I when I was your age. I thought it
-would be the best fun in the world to be a Red Revenger
-of the Seas.”</p>
-
-<p>“Wouldn’t it, though!” exclaimed Harry. “I
-don’t mean it would be fun to kill people, and to
-steal watches, but to have a schooner of your own,
-and go cruising everywhere, and have storms and—and—hurricanes,
-you know.”</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_9">[9]</span>“Why shouldn’t you do it this summer?” asked
-Uncle John. “If you want to cruise in a craft of
-your own, you shall do it; that is, if your father
-doesn’t object. A schooner would be a little too big
-for a boy of thirteen; but you and two or three other
-fellows might make a splendid cruise in a row-boat.
-You could have a mast and sail, and you could take
-provisions and things, and cruise from Harlem all
-the way up into the lakes in the Northern woods.
-It would be all the same as piracy, except that you
-would not be committing crimes, and making innocent
-people wretched.”</p>
-
-<p>“Uncle John, it would be just gorgeous! We’d
-have a gun and a lot of fishing-lines, and we could
-live on fish and bears. There’s bears in the woods,
-you know.”</p>
-
-<p>“You won’t find many bears, I’m afraid; but you
-would have to take a gun, and you might possibly
-find a wild-cat or two. Who is there that would go
-with you?”</p>
-
-<p>“Oh, there’s Tom Schuyler, and Joe and Jim<span class="pagenum" id="Page_10">[10]</span>
-Sharpe; and there’s Sam M‘Grath—though he’d be
-quarrelling all the time. Maybe Charley Smith’s
-father would let him go. He is a first-rate fellow.
-You’d ought to see him play base-ball once!”</p>
-
-<p>“Three boys besides yourself would be enough.
-If you have too many, there will be too much risk of
-quarrelling. There is one thing you must be sure of—no
-boy must go who can’t swim.”</p>
-
-<p>“Oh, all the fellows can swim, except Bill Town.
-He was pretty near drowned last summer. He’d
-been bragging about what a stunning swimmer he
-was, and the boys believed him; so one day one of
-the fellows shoved him off the float, where we go
-in swimming at our school, and he thought he was
-dead for sure. The water was only up to his neck,
-but he couldn’t swim a stroke.”</p>
-
-<p>“Well, if you can get three good fellows to go
-with you—boys that you know are not blackguards,
-but are the kind of boys that your father would be
-willing to have you associate with—I’ll give you a
-boat and a tent, and you shall have a better cruise<span class="pagenum" id="Page_11">[11]</span>
-than any pirate ever had; for no real pirate ever
-found any fun in being a thief and a murderer. You
-go and see Tom and the Sharpe boys, and tell them
-about it. I’ll see about the boat as soon as you have
-shipped your crew.”</p>
-
-<p>“You are quite sure that your plan is a good
-one?” asked Mr. Wilson, as the boy vanished, with
-sparkling eyes, to search for his comrades. “Isn’t it
-very risky to let the boys go off by themselves in a
-boat? Won’t they get drowned?”</p>
-
-<p>“There is always more or less danger in boating,”
-replied Uncle John; “but the boys can swim; and
-they cannot learn prudence and self-reliance without
-running some risks. Yes, it is a good plan, I am
-sure. It will give them plenty of exercise in the
-open air, and will teach them to like manly, honest
-sports. You see that the reason Harry likes piratical
-stories is his natural love of adventure. I venture
-to predict that if their cruise turns out well, those
-four boys will think stories of pirates are stupid as
-well as silly.”</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_12">[12]</span>So the matter was decided. Harry found that
-Tom Schuyler and the Sharpe boys were delighted
-with the plan, and Uncle John soon obtained the
-consent of Mr. Schuyler and Mr. Sharpe. The boys
-immediately began to make preparations for the
-cruise; and Uncle John bought a row-boat, and employed
-a boat-builder to make such alterations as
-were necessary to fit his for service.</p>
-
-<p>The boat was what is called a Whitehall row-boat.
-She was seventeen feet long, and rowed very easily,
-and she carried a small mast with a spritsail. By
-Uncle John’s orders an air-tight box, made of tin,
-was fitted into each end of the boat, so that, even
-if she were to be filled with water, the air in the tin
-boxes would float her. She was painted white outside,
-with a narrow blue streak, and dark brown inside.
-Harry named her the <i>Whitewing</i>; and his
-mother made a beautiful silk signal for her, which
-was to be carried at the sprit when under sail, and
-on a small staff at the bow of the boat at other
-times. For oars there were two pairs of light seven-foot<span class="pagenum" id="Page_13">[13]</span>
-sculls, and a pair of ten-foot oars, each of which
-was to be pulled by a single boy. The rudder was
-fitted with a yoke and a pair of lines, and the sail
-was of new and very light canvas. On one side of
-the boat was a little locker, made to hold a gun;
-and on the other side were places for fishing-rods
-and fishing-tackle. When she was brought around
-to Harlem, and Harry saw her for the first time, he
-was so overjoyed that he turned two or three hand-springs,
-bringing up during the last one against a
-post—an exploit which nearly broke his shin, and
-induced his uncle to remark that he would never
-rise to distinction as a Moral Pirate unless he could
-give up turning hand-springs while on duty.</p>
-
-<div class="figcenter" id="13a"><img src="images/i_012b.jpg" alt="THE WHITEWING AT HARLEM" /></div>
-<p class="caption">THE “WHITEWING” AT HARLEM.</p>
-
-<p>Harry could row very fairly, for he belonged to a
-boat-club at school. It was not very much of a club;
-but then the club-boat was not very much of a boat,
-being a small, flat-bottomed skiff, which leaked so
-badly that she could not be kept afloat unless one
-boy kept constantly at work bailing. However,
-Harry learned to row in her, and he now found this<span class="pagenum" id="Page_14">[14]</span>
-knowledge very useful. He was anxious to start on
-the cruise immediately, but his uncle insisted that
-the crew must first be trained. “I must teach you
-to sail, and you must teach your crew to row,” said
-Uncle John. “The Department will never consent
-to let a boat go on a cruise unless her commander
-and her crew know their duty.”</p>
-
-<p>“What’s the Department?” asked Harry.</p>
-
-<p>“The Navy Department in the United States service
-has the whole charge of the Navy, and sends vessels
-where it pleases. Now, I consider that I represent
-a Department of Moral Piracy, and I therefore
-superintend the fitting out of the <i>Whitewing</i>. You
-can’t expect moral piracy to flourish unless you respect
-the Department, and obey its orders.”</p>
-
-<p>“All right, uncle,” replied Harry. “Of course the
-Department furnishes stores and everything else for
-a cruise, doesn’t it?”</p>
-
-<p>“I suppose it must,” said his uncle, laughing. “I
-didn’t think of that when I proposed to become a
-department.”</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_15">[15]</span>The boys met every day at Harlem and practised
-rowing. Uncle John taught them how to sail the
-boat, by letting them take her out under sail when
-there was very little breeze, while he kept close
-along-side in another boat very much like the <i>Whitewing</i>.
-Harry sat in the stern-sheets, holding the
-yoke-lines. Tom Schuyler, who was fourteen years
-old, and a boy of more than usual prudence, sat on
-the nearest thwart and held the sheet, which passed
-under a cleat without being made fast to it, in his
-hand. Next came Jim Sharpe, whose business it was
-to unship the mast when the captain should order
-sail to be taken in; and on the forward thwart sat
-Joe Sharpe, who was not quite twelve, and who kept
-the boat-hook within reach, so as to use it on coming
-to shore. The boys kept the same positions when
-rowing, Tom Schuyler being the stroke. Uncle John
-told them that if every one always had the same
-seat, and had a particular duty assigned to him, it
-would prevent confusion and dispute, and greatly
-increase the safety of the vessel and crew.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_16">[16]</span>It was not long before Harry could sail the boat
-nicely, and the others, by attending closely to Uncle
-John’s lessons, learned almost as much as their young
-captain. So far as boat-sailing can be taught in fair
-weather, Harry was carefully and thoroughly taught
-in six or seven lessons, and could handle the <i>Whitewing</i>
-beautifully; but the ability to judge of the
-weather, to tell when it is going to blow, and how
-the wind will probably shift, can of course be learned
-only by actual experience.</p>
-<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" />
-
-<div class="chapter">
-<span class="pagenum" id="Page_17">[17]</span>
-
-<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER II.</h2>
-</div>
-
-<div>
- <img class="drop-cap" src="images/i_017.jpg" width="75" height="87" alt="W" />
-</div>
-
-<p class="drop-cap">WHEN Uncle John announced that the Department
-was satisfied with the ability of
-the captain and crew to manage the <i>Whitewing</i>,
-the day for sailing was fixed, and the boys
-laid in their stores. Each one had a fishing-line
-and hooks, and Harry and Tom each took a fishing-pole—two
-poles being as many as were needed,
-since most of the fishing would probably be done
-with drop-lines. Uncle John lent Harry his double-barrelled
-gun, and a supply of ammunition. Each
-boy took a tin plate, a tin cup, knife, fork, and spoon.
-For cooking purposes, the boat carried a coffee-pot,
-two tin cake-pans, which could be used as frying-pans
-as well as for other purposes, and two small
-tin pails. Harry’s mother lent him several large<span class="pagenum" id="Page_18">[18]</span>
-round tin boxes, in which were stored four pounds
-of coffee, two pounds of sugar, a pound of Indian
-meal, a large quantity of crackers, some salt, and a
-little pepper. The rest of the provisions consisted
-of two cans of soup, two cans of corned-beef, a can of
-roast-beef, two small cans of devilled chicken, four
-cans of fresh peaches, a little package of condensed
-beef for making beef-tea, and a cold boiled ham.
-The boat was furnished with an <b>A</b> tent, four rubber
-blankets and four woollen blankets, a hatchet, a
-quantity of spare cordage, a little bull’s-eye lantern,
-which burnt olive-oil, a few copper nails, a pair of
-pliers, and a small piece of zinc and a little white-lead
-for mending a leak. Of course there was a bottle
-of oil for the lantern; and Mrs. Schuyler added
-a little box of pills and a bottle of “Hamlin’s Mixture”
-as medical stores. The boys wore blue flannel
-trousers and shirts, and each one carried an extra
-pair of trousers, and an extra shirt instead of a coat.
-These, with a few pairs of stockings and two or three
-handkerchiefs, were all the clothing that they needed,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_19">[19]</span>
-so Uncle John said; though the boys had imagined
-that they must take at least two complete
-suits. He showed them that two flannel shirts worn
-at the same time, one over the other, would be as
-warm as one shirt and a coat, and that if their clothing
-became wet, it could be easily dried. “Flannel
-and the compass are the two things that are indispensable
-to navigation,” said Uncle John: “if flannel
-shirts had not been invented, Columbus would
-never have crossed the Atlantic.” Perhaps there
-was a little exaggeration in this; but when we remember
-that flannel is the only material that is
-warm in cold weather and cool in hot weather, and
-that dries almost as soon as it is wrung out and
-hung in the wind, it is difficult to see how sailors
-could do without it.</p>
-
-<p>The boys agreed very readily to take with them
-only what Uncle John advised. Tom Schuyler, however,
-was very anxious to take a heavy iron vise,
-which he said could be screwed on the gunwale of
-the boat, and might prove to be very useful, although<span class="pagenum" id="Page_20">[20]</span>
-he could not say precisely what he expected
-to use it for. Joe Sharpe also wanted to take a base-ball
-and bat, but neither the vise nor the ball and
-bat were taken.</p>
-
-<p>The <i>Whitewing</i> started from the foot of East
-127th Street, on a Monday morning in the middle
-of July, at about nine o’clock. Quite a small crowd
-of friends were present to see the boys off, and the
-neat appearance of the boat and her crew attracted
-the attention of all the idlers along the shore.
-When all the cargo was stowed, and everything was
-ready, Uncle John called the boys aside, and said,
-“Now, boys, you must sign the articles.”</p>
-
-<p>“What are articles?” asked all the boys at once.</p>
-
-<p>“They are certain regulations, which every respectable
-pirate, or any other sailor for that matter, must
-agree to keep when he joins a ship. I’ll read the
-articles, and if any of you don’t like any one of them
-say so frankly, for you must not begin a cruise in a
-dissatisfied state of mind. Here are the articles:</p>
-
-<p>“‘I. <i>We, the captain and crew of the</i> Whitewing,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_21">[21]</span>
-<i>promise to decide all disputed questions by the vote
-of the majority, except questions concerning the management
-of the boat. The orders of the captain, in all
-matters connected with the management of the boat,
-shall be promptly obeyed by the crew.</i>’</p>
-
-<p>“Now, if anybody thinks that the captain should
-not have the full control of the boat, let him say
-so at once. Very likely the captain will make mistakes;
-but the boat will be safer, even if the crew
-obeys a wrong order, than it would be if every order
-should be debated by the crew. You can’t hold
-town-meetings when you are afloat. Harry, I think,
-understands pretty well how to sail the boat. Will
-you agree to obey his orders?”</p>
-
-<p>All the boys said they would; and Joe Sharpe
-added that he thought the captain ought to have the
-right to put mutineers in irons.</p>
-
-<p>“That, let us hope, will not be necessary,” said
-Uncle John. “Now listen to the second article:</p>
-
-<p>“‘II. <i>We promise not to take corn, apples, or other
-property without permission of the owner.</i>’</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_22">[22]</span>“You will very likely camp near some field where
-corn, or potatoes, or something eatable, is growing.
-Many people think there is no harm in taking a few
-ears of corn or a half-dozen apples. I want you to
-remember that to take anything that is not your
-own, unless you have permission to do so, is stealing.
-It’s an ugly word, but it can’t be smoothed over in
-any way. Do you object to this article?”</p>
-
-<p>Nobody objected to it. “We’re moral pirates,
-Uncle John,” said Tom Schuyler, “and we won’t disgrace
-the Department by stealing.”</p>
-
-<p>“I know you would not, except through thoughtlessness.
-Now these are all the articles. I did think
-of asking you not to quarrel or to use bad language,
-but I don’t believe it is necessary to ask you to
-make such a promise, and if it were, you probably
-would not keep it. So, sign the articles, give them
-to the captain, and take your stations.”</p>
-
-<p>The articles were signed. The captain seated himself
-in the stern-sheets, and took the yoke-lines. The
-rest took their proper places, and Joe Sharpe held<span class="pagenum" id="Page_23">[23]</span>
-the boat to the dock by the boat-hook. “Are you
-all ready?” cried Uncle John. “All ready, sir!” answered
-Harry. “Then give way with your oars!
-Good-bye, boys, and don’t forget to send reports to
-the Department.”</p>
-
-<p>The boat glided away from the shore with Tom
-and Jim each pulling a pair of sculls. The group on
-the dock gave the boys a farewell cheer, and in a few
-moments they were hid from sight by the Third Avenue
-bridge. The tide was against them, but the
-day was a cool one for the season, and the boys rowed
-steadily on in the very best of spirits. There was
-a light south wind, but, as there were several bridges
-to pass, Harry thought it best not to set the sail before
-reaching the Hudson River. It required careful
-steering to avoid the steamboats, bridge-piles, and
-small boats; but the <i>Whitewing</i> was guided safely,
-and her signal—a red flag with a white cross—floated
-gayly at the bow.</p>
-
-<p>Uncle John had made one serious mistake: he had
-forgotten all about the tide, and never thought of<span class="pagenum" id="Page_24">[24]</span>
-the difficulty the boys would find in passing Farmersbridge
-with the tide against them. They had passed
-High Bridge, and had entered a part of the river
-with which the boys were not familiar, when Joe
-Sharpe suddenly called out, “There’s a low bridge
-right ahead that we can’t pass.” A few more
-strokes of the oars enabled Harry to see a long low
-bridge, which completely blocked up the river except
-at one place, that seemed not much wider than the
-boat. Through this narrow channel the tide was
-rushing fiercely, the water heaping itself up in waves
-that looked unpleasantly high and rough. The boat
-was rowed as close as possible to the opening under
-the bridge; but the current was so strong that the
-boys could not row against it, and even if they had
-been able to stem it, the channel was too narrow to
-permit them to use the oars.</p>
-
-<p>Harry ordered the boat to be rowed up to the
-bridge at a place where there was a quiet eddy, and
-all the crew went ashore to contrive some way of
-overcoming the difficulty. Presently Harry thought<span class="pagenum" id="Page_25">[25]</span>
-of a plan. “If we could get the painter under the
-bridge, we could pull the boat through easy enough
-if there was nobody in her.”</p>
-
-<p>“That’s all very well,” said Joe, “but how are you
-going to get the painter through?”</p>
-
-<p>“I know,” cried Jim. “Let’s take a long piece of
-rope and drop it in the water the other side of the
-bridge. The current will float it through, and we
-can catch it and tie it to the painter.”</p>
-
-<p>The plan seemed a good one; and so the boys took
-a piece of spare rope from the boat, tied a bit of board
-to one end of it for a float, dropped the float into
-the water, and held on to the other end of the rope.
-When the float came in sight below the bridge they
-caught it with the boat-hook, and, throwing away
-the piece of board, tied the rope to the painter.
-“Now let Joe Sharpe get in the bow of the boat, to
-keep her from running against anything, and we’ll
-haul her right through,” exclaimed Harry.</p>
-
-<p>Joe took his place in the bow, and, pushing the
-boat off, let her float into the current. Then the<span class="pagenum" id="Page_26">[26]</span>
-three other boys pulled on the rope, and were delighted
-to see the boat glide under the bridge. Suddenly
-Joe gave a wild yell. “She’s sinking, boys!”
-he cried: “let go the rope, or I’ll be drowned!” The
-boys, terribly frightened, dropped the rope, and in another
-minute the boat floated back on the current,
-half full of water, and without Joe. Almost as soon
-as it came in sight, Harry had thrown off his shoes
-and jumped into the river.</p>
-
-<div class="figcenter" id="27a"><img src="images/i_026b.jpg" alt="HARRY SWIMS FOR THE EDDY" /></div>
-<p class="caption">HARRY SWIMS FOR THE EDDY.</p>
-<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" />
-
-<div class="chapter">
-<span class="pagenum" id="Page_27">[27]</span>
-
-<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER III.</h2>
-</div>
-
-<div>
- <img class="drop-cap" src="images/i_027.jpg" width="75" height="84" alt="A" />
-</div>
-
-<p class="drop-cap">AS Harry vanished, Joe’s head appeared, as he
-climbed up the side of the bridge and joined
-his brother and Tom. Their anxiety was
-now for Harry, who had been swept through the
-channel under the bridge, and was manfully swimming
-toward the eddy where the boys had landed.
-He came ashore none the worse for his bath, and was
-delighted to find that Joe was not only safe but dry.
-Joe explained that the boat had drifted against one
-of the piles of the bridge, and the current and the
-tow-rope together had forced one of her sides so low
-down that the water began to pour in. Joe thought
-that if the river intended to get into the boat, he
-had better get out; so he sprung up and caught one
-of the timbers of the bridge, and so climbed safely<span class="pagenum" id="Page_28">[28]</span>
-up to the roadway. The boat, relieved of his weight
-and freed from the tow-line, drifted quietly away,
-and was now floating peacefully on the river about
-twenty rods from the shore.</p>
-
-<p>Luckily an old man in a row-boat saw the runaway
-<i>Whitewing</i>, and kindly caught her and brought
-her up to the bridge. As the boys baled her out,
-they told him how the accident happened, and the
-gruff old man said it “sarved ’em right.” “When
-you tow a boat next time,” he continued, “you’ll
-know enough to put all your weight in the stern.
-Did you ever see a steamboat towing a row-boat
-with a man in the bow? If ever you do, you’ll see
-him going overboard mighty quick. A boat’ll sheer
-all over creation if you tow her with a fellow in the
-bow. You just put the biggest of you fellows in
-the stern of that there boat, and she’ll go through
-under the bridge just as steady as a church.”</p>
-
-<p>The boys gladly took the old man’s advice. When
-the boat was baled out, they floated the rope down
-again, and when it was made fast, Tom Schuyler, who<span class="pagenum" id="Page_29">[29]</span>
-was the heaviest of the boys, offered to sit in the
-stern. His weight brought the bow of the boat out
-of the water, and she was towed quickly and safely
-through. The boys resumed their places as soon as
-Harry had put on dry clothes, and after a short and
-easy row glided under the Spuyten Duyvel railway
-bridge, and found themselves on the broad and placid
-Hudson. They rowed on for nearly a mile, and
-then, having found a little sandy cove, ran the boat
-aground, and went ashore to rest. After a good
-swim, which all greatly enjoyed, including Harry,
-who said that his recent bath at Farmersbridge
-ought not to be counted, since it was more of a duty
-than a pleasure, they sat down to eat a nice cold
-lunch of ham sandwiches that Mrs. Wilson had kindly
-prepared; and when they were no longer hungry,
-they stretched themselves lazily in the shade.</p>
-
-<p>“Well, boys,” said Harry, “we made a big mistake
-at the bridge; but we learned something, and we
-won’t get the boat swamped that way again.”</p>
-
-<p>“I’m awfully obliged to Harry for jumping in after<span class="pagenum" id="Page_30">[30]</span>
-me,” said Joe; “but it’s the first time I ever
-heard of a captain jumping over after a sailor.
-When a sailor falls overboard, the captain just stands
-on the deck and looks around, kind of careless like,
-while the second mate and four sailors jump into a
-boat and pick the man up. That’s the way it’s done;
-for I know a fellow that saw a man fall overboard
-on a steamship, and he said that was how the captain
-did.”</p>
-
-<p>“All right,” said Harry; “I won’t jump in for
-you again, Joe. The fact is, boys, I oughtn’t to have
-done it without waiting to find out whether there
-was really anything the matter with Joe. I’ll tell
-you what we’ll do. Joe is a first-rate swimmer, and
-we’ll make a rule that whenever anybody is to jump
-into the river for anything, Joe shall do it. What
-do you say?”</p>
-
-<p>“Oh, I’m willing enough,” said Joe. “I don’t care
-who jumps as long as the captain don’t. It won’t
-look well for the captain to be all the time jumping
-overboard to pick somebody up.”</p>
-
-<p>“A better rule,” remarked Tom, “would be that
-no fellow shall fall overboard.”</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_31">[31]</span>“I move to amend that,” cried Jim, “by forbidding
-any accidents to happen to any of us.”</p>
-
-<p>“But you can’t do that,” said Tom, who never
-understood a joke. “Accidents never would happen
-if people could help themselves.”</p>
-
-<p>“Well,” said Harry, “if the rest of you will agree
-not to fall overboard, I’ll promise that the captain
-sha’n’t spend all his time in jumping after you. But
-if you are all ready, we’d better start on. There’s a
-nice little breeze, and we can rest in the boat.”</p>
-
-<p>By this time Harry’s shirt and trousers, which had
-been wrung out and hung up on a bush, were perfectly
-dry. He packed them away with his rubber
-blanket rolled tightly around them, and Jim attended
-to the duty of stepping the mast. Then the boys
-took their places, and Joe pushed the boat off with
-the boat-hook. The gentle breeze filled the sail, and
-the <i>Whitewing</i> went peacefully on her way up the
-river.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_32">[32]</span>“Boys,” said Harry, presently, “it’s getting awfully
-hot.”</p>
-
-<p>“That’s because we’re sailing right before the
-wind,” said Tom. “We are going just about as fast
-as the wind goes, and that’s the reason why we don’t
-feel it.”</p>
-
-<p>“Is this a lecture on wind, by Professor Thomas
-Schuyler?” asked Joe. “Because if it is, I’d rather
-hear it when it’s cooler. Let’s go over to the other
-side of the river, where we can get in the shade of
-the Palisades.”</p>
-
-<p>It was now about three o’clock, and the sun was
-very hot. The boat seemed to the boys to creep
-across the river, and the Palisades seemed to move
-away just as fast as they approached them. When
-they finally did come into the shadow of those huge
-rocks, they thought they had never known anything
-so delightful as the change from the scorching sunshine
-to the cool shade. Joe and his brother stretched
-themselves out, and put their blankets under their
-heads; presently they grew tired of talking, and in<span class="pagenum" id="Page_33">[33]</span>
-a little while they were fast asleep. Tom was not
-sleepy; but he was so delighted with the beauty of
-the shore, as seen from the boat, that he did not care
-to talk.</p>
-
-<p>For a long time the boat glided stealthily along.
-The Palisades were passed, and a long pier projecting
-into the river from the west shore gradually came
-in sight. When the boat came up with the pier, half
-a dozen barges lay along-side of it, into which men
-were sliding enormous cakes of ice. The Sharpe boys
-woke up, and proposed to stop and get a little ice.
-The men let them pick up as many small pieces of ice
-as they could carry, and they went on their way so
-much refreshed that they chattered away as gayly as
-possible.</p>
-
-<p>Uncle John had warned them to select a camping-ground
-long before dark. They remembered this
-advice, and at about five o’clock they landed on a
-little low point of land a few miles below the entrance
-to the Highlands. They first hauled the boat
-a little way up the beach, so that it would be sure<span class="pagenum" id="Page_34">[34]</span>
-not to float off, and then began to take the tent, the
-cooking things, and the provisions for supper out of
-her.</p>
-
-<p>“We want to pitch the tent and make a fire,” said
-Harry, “and somebody ought to get some milk.
-Let’s pitch the tent first.”</p>
-
-<p>“I’ll do that,” said Tom, “while you fellows get
-the supper.”</p>
-
-<p>“It takes two or three fellows to pitch the tent,”
-said Harry; “you can’t do it alone.”</p>
-
-<p>“I’ll undertake to pitch it alone,” replied Tom.
-“One of you can get firewood, one can go for milk,
-and the other can get out the things for supper.
-Here goes for the tent.”</p>
-
-<p>The tent was furnished with two upright poles
-and a ridge-pole, each one of which was made in
-two pieces and joined together with ferules, like a
-fishing-rod. Tom selected a soft sandy spot close by
-the water’s edge, where he spread out the tent, and
-pinned down each of the four corners with rough
-wooden pins, which he cut with the hatchet from a<span class="pagenum" id="Page_35">[35]</span>
-piece of driftwood. Then he crept under the canvas
-with the poles. He put one of the upright poles in
-its place with the end of the ridge-pole over it, and
-then, holding the other end of the ridge-pole in one
-hand, he put the second pole in position with his
-other hand, and pushed the end of the ridge-pole
-into its proper place. The tent was now pitched;
-and all that remained to be done was to tighten the
-four corner pegs and to drive in the other ones.</p>
-
-<p>Meanwhile Jim had taken one of the pails and
-gone toward a distant farm-house for milk. Joe had
-collected a pile of firewood, and Harry had lighted
-the fire and put the other tin pail half full of water
-to boil over it. By the time the water had boiled,
-Jim had returned, bringing the milk with him. It
-did not take long to make coffee; and then the boys
-sat down on the sand, each with a tin cup of hot
-coffee at his side, and proceeded to eat a supper of
-ham sandwiches and cake. It was not the kind of
-supper that they expected to have on subsequent
-nights; but Mrs. Wilson’s sandwiches and cake had<span class="pagenum" id="Page_36">[36]</span>
-to be eaten in order to keep them from spoiling.
-After the coffee was gone they each had a cup of
-cold milk, and then put the rest of it in a shady
-place to be used for breakfast. The provisions were
-carefully covered up, so as to protect them in case
-of rain, and then the beds were made. This last
-operation was a very easy one, since the sand was
-soft enough for a mattress, and all that needed to
-be done was to spread the rubber blankets on the
-ground as a protection from the damp. Then the
-boys rolled up their spare clothing for pillows, and,
-wrapping themselves in their blankets, were soon
-sound asleep.</p>
-<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" />
-
-<div class="chapter">
-<span class="pagenum" id="Page_37">[37]</span>
-
-<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER IV.</h2>
-</div>
-
-<div>
- <img class="drop-cap" src="images/i_037.jpg" width="75" height="88" alt="S" />
-</div>
-
-<p class="drop-cap">SOME time in the middle of the night Joe
-Sharpe woke up from a dream that he had
-fallen into the river, and could not get out.
-He thought that he had caught hold of the supports
-of a bridge, and had drawn himself partly out of the
-water, but that he had not strength enough to drag
-his legs out, and that, on the contrary, he was slowly
-sinking back. When he awoke he found that he
-was very cold, and that his blanket felt particularly
-heavy. He put his hand down to move the blanket,
-when, to his great surprise, he found that he was
-lying with his legs in a pool of water.</p>
-
-<p>Joe instantly shouted to the other boys, and told
-them to wake up, for it was raining, and the tent
-was leaking. As each boy woke up he found himself<span class="pagenum" id="Page_38">[38]</span>
-as wet as Joe, and at first all supposed that it
-was raining heavily. They soon found, however, that
-no rain-drops were pattering on the outside of the
-tent, and that the stars were shining through the open flap.
-“There’s water in this tent,” said Tom,
-with the air of having made a grand discovery. “If
-any of you fellows have been throwing water on me,
-it was a mean trick,” said Jim. All at once an idea
-struck Harry. “Boys,” he exclaimed, “it’s the tide!
-We’ve got to get out of this place mighty quick, or
-the tide will wash the tent away.”</p>
-
-<p>The boys sprung up, and rushed out of the tent.
-They had gone to bed at low-tide, and as the tide
-rose it had gradually invaded the tent. The boat
-was still safe, but the water had surrounded it, and
-in a very short time would be deep enough to float
-it. The tide was still rising, and it was evident that
-no time should be lost if the tent was to be saved.</p>
-
-<p>Two of the boys hurriedly seized the blankets and
-other articles which were in the tent, and carried them
-on to the higher ground; while the other two pulled<span class="pagenum" id="Page_39">[39]</span>
-up the pins, and dragged the tent out of reach
-of the water. Then they pulled the boat farther
-up the beach, and, having thus made everything safe,
-had leisure to discover that they were miserably
-cold, and that their clothes, from the waist down,
-were wet through.</p>
-
-<p>Luckily, their spare clothing, which they had used
-for pillows, was untouched by the water, so that they
-were able to put on dry shirts and trousers. Their
-blankets, however, had been thoroughly soaked,
-and it was too cold to think of sleeping without
-them. There was nothing to be done but to build
-a fire, and sit around it until daylight. It was by no
-means easy to collect firewood in the dark; and as
-soon as a boy succeeded in getting an armful of driftwood,
-he usually stumbled and fell down with it.
-There was not very much fun in this; but when the
-fire finally blazed up, and its pleasant warmth conquered
-the cold night air, the boys began to regain
-their spirits.</p>
-
-<p>“I wonder what time it is?” said one.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_40">[40]</span>Tom had a watch, but he had forgotten to wind it
-up for two or three nights, and it had stopped at eight
-o’clock. The boys were quite sure, however, that they
-could not have been asleep more than half an hour.</p>
-
-<p>“It’s about one o’clock,” said Harry, presently.</p>
-
-<p>“I don’t believe it’s more than nine,” said Joe.</p>
-
-<p>“We must have gone into the tent about an hour
-after sunset,” continued Harry, “and the sun sets between
-six and seven. It was low-tide then, and it’s
-pretty near high-tide now; and since the tide runs
-up for about six hours, it must be somewhere between
-twelve and one.”</p>
-
-<p>“You’re right,” exclaimed Jim. “Look at the
-stars. That bright star over there in the west was
-just rising when we went to bed.”</p>
-
-<p>“You ought to say ‘turned in!’” said Joe. “Sailors
-never go to bed; they always ‘turn in.’”</p>
-
-<p>“Well, we can’t turn in any more to-night,” replied
-Tom. “What do you say, boys? suppose we have
-breakfast—it’ll pass away the time, and we can have
-another breakfast by-and-by.”</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_41">[41]</span>Now that the boys thought of it, they began to
-feel hungry, for they had had a very light supper.
-Everybody felt that hot coffee would be very nice;
-so they all went to work—made coffee, fried a piece
-of ham, and, with a few slices of bread, made a capital
-breakfast. They wrung out the wet blankets
-and clothes, and hung them up by the fire to dry.
-Then they had to collect more firewood; and gradually
-the faint light of the dawn became visible, before
-they really had time to find the task of waiting
-for daylight tiresome.</p>
-
-<p>They decided that it would not do to start with
-wet blankets, since they could not dry them in the
-boat. They therefore continued to keep up a brisk
-fire, and to watch the blankets closely, in order to
-see that they did not get scorched. After a time the
-sun came out bright and hot, and took the drying
-business in charge. The boys went into the river,
-and had a nice long swim, and then spent some
-time in carefully packing everything into the boat.
-By the time the blankets were dry, and they were<span class="pagenum" id="Page_42">[42]</span>
-ready to start, the tide had fallen so low that the
-boat was high and dry; and in spite of all their efforts
-they could not launch her while she was loaded.</p>
-
-<p>“We’ll have to take all the things out of her,” said
-Harry.</p>
-
-<p>“It reminds me,” remarked Joe, “of Robinson
-Crusoe that time he built his big canoe, and then
-couldn’t launch it.”</p>
-
-<p>“Robinson wasn’t very sharp,” said Jim. “Why
-didn’t he make a set of rollers, and put them on the
-boat?”</p>
-
-<p>“Much good rollers would have been,” replied
-Joe. “Wasn’t there a hill between the boat and the
-water? He couldn’t roll a heavy boat uphill, could
-he?”</p>
-
-<p>“He could have made a couple of pulleys, and
-rigged a rope through them, and then made a windlass,
-and put the rope round it,” argued Jim.</p>
-
-<p>“Yes; and he could have built a steam-engine
-and a railroad, and dragged the boat down to the
-shore that way, just about as easy.”</p>
-
-<div class="figcenter" id="43a"><img src="images/i_042b.jpg" alt="IF YOU WANT TO DIG, DIG." /></div>
-<p class="caption">“IF YOU WANT TO DIG, DIG. I DON’T INTEND<br /> TO DO ANY MORE
-DIGGING.”</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_43">[43]</span>“He couldn’t dig a canal, for he thought about that,
-and found it would take too much work,” said Jim.</p>
-
-<p>“But we can,” cried Harry. “If we just scoop
-out a little sand, we can launch the boat with everything
-in her!”</p>
-
-<p>The boys liked the idea of a canal; and they each
-found a large shingle on the beach, and began to dig.
-They dug for nearly an hour, but the boat was no
-nearer being launched than when they began. Tom
-stopped digging, and made a calculation. “It will
-take about two days of hard work to dig a canal
-deep enough to float that boat. If you want to dig,
-dig; I don’t intend to do any more digging.”</p>
-
-<p>When the other boys considered the matter, they
-saw that Tom was right, and they gave up the idea
-of making a canal. It was now about ten o’clock,
-and they were rather tired and very hungry. A
-second breakfast was agreed to be necessary, and
-once more the fire was built up and a meal prepared.
-Then the boat was unloaded and launched, and the
-boys, taking off their shoes and rolling up their trousers,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_44">[44]</span>
-waded in the water and reloaded her. It was
-noon by the sun before they finally had everything
-in order and resumed their cruise.</p>
-
-<p>There was no wind, and it was necessary to take
-to the oars. The disadvantage of starting at so late
-an hour soon became painfully plain. The sun was
-so nearly overhead that the heat was almost unbearable,
-and there was not a particle of shade. The
-boys had not had a full night’s sleep, and had tired
-themselves before starting by trying to dig a canal.
-Of course the labor of rowing in such circumstances
-was very severe; and it was not long before first one
-and then another proposed to go ashore and rest in
-the shade.</p>
-
-<p>“Hadn’t we better keep on till we get into the
-Highlands. We can do it in a quarter of an hour,”
-said Tom.</p>
-
-<p>As Tom was pulling the stroke oar, and doing
-rather more work than any one else, the others
-agreed to row on as long as he would row. They
-soon reached the entrance to the Highlands, and<span class="pagenum" id="Page_45">[45]</span>
-landed at the foot of the great hill called St. Anthony’s
-Nose. They were very glad to make the
-boat fast to a tree that grew close to the water, and
-to clamber a little way up the hill into the shade.</p>
-
-<p>“What will we do to pass away the time till it gets
-cooler?” said Harry, after they had rested awhile.</p>
-
-<p>“I can tell you what I’m going to do,” said Tom;
-“I’m going to get some of the sleep that I didn’t get
-last night, and you’d better follow my example.”</p>
-
-<p>All the boys at once found that they were sleepy;
-and, having brought the tent up from the boat, they
-spread it on the ground for a bed, and presently were
-sleeping soundly. The mosquitoes came and feasted
-on them, and the innumerable insects of the summer
-woods crawled over them, and explored their necks,
-shirt-sleeves, and trousers-legs, as is the pleasant custom
-of insects of an inquiring turn of mind.</p>
-
-<p>“What’s that?” cried Harry, suddenly sitting up,
-as the sound of a heavy explosion died away in long,
-rolling echoes.</p>
-
-<p>“I heard it,” said Joe; “it’s a cannon. The cadets<span class="pagenum" id="Page_46">[46]</span>
-up at West Point are firing at a mark with a tremendous
-big cannon.”</p>
-
-<p>“Let’s go up and see them,” exclaimed Jim. “It’s
-a great deal cooler than it was.”</p>
-
-<p>With the natural eagerness of boys to be in the
-neighborhood of a cannon, they made haste to gather
-up the tent and carry it to the boat. As they came
-out from under the thick trees, they saw that the
-sky in the north was as black as midnight, and that
-a thunder-storm was close at hand.</p>
-
-<p>“Your cannon, Joe, was a clap of thunder,” said
-Harry. “We’re going to get wet again.”</p>
-
-<p>“We needn’t get wet,” said Tom. “If we hurry
-up we can get the tent pitched and put the things
-in it, so as to keep them dry.”</p>
-
-<p>They worked rapidly, for the rain was approaching
-fast, but it was not easy to pitch the tent on a
-side hill. It was done, however, after a fashion; and
-the blankets and other things that were liable to be
-injured by the wet were safely under shelter before
-the storm reached them.</p>
-<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" />
-
-<div class="chapter">
-<span class="pagenum" id="Page_47">[47]</span>
-
-<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER V.</h2>
-</div>
-
-<div>
- <img class="drop-cap" src="images/i_047.jpg" width="75" height="82" alt="I" />
-</div>
-
-<p class="drop-cap">IT was a terrific storm. The wind swept
-down the river, raising a ridge of white water
-in its path. The rain came down harder, so
-the boys thought, than they had ever seen it come
-down before, and the glare of the lightning and the
-crash of the thunder were frightful.</p>
-
-<p>“What luck it is that we got the tent pitched in
-time,” exclaimed Joe. “We’re as dry and comfortable
-here as if we were in a house.”</p>
-
-<p>“Pick your blankets up quick, boys,” cried Harry.
-“Here’s the water coming in under the tent.”</p>
-
-<p>Joe had boasted a little too soon. The water
-running down the side of the hill was making its
-way in large quantities into the tent. To save their
-clothes and blankets, the boys had to stand up and<span class="pagenum" id="Page_48">[48]</span>
-hold them in their arms, which was by no means a
-pleasant occupation, especially as the cold rain-water
-was bathing their feet.</p>
-
-<p>“It can’t last long,” remarked Tom. “We’re all
-right if the lightning doesn’t strike us.”</p>
-
-<p>“Where’s the powder?” asked Harry.</p>
-
-<p>“Oh, it’s in the flask,” replied Joe, “and I’ve got
-the flask in my pocket.”</p>
-
-<p>“So, if the lightning strikes the tent, we’ll all be
-blown up,” exclaimed Harry. “This is getting more
-and more pleasant.”</p>
-
-<p>The boys were not yet at the end of their troubles.
-The rain had loosened the earth, and the tent-pins,
-of which only four had been used, were no longer fit
-to hold the tent. So, while they were talking about
-the powder, the tent suddenly blew down, upsetting
-the boys as it fell, and burying them under the wet
-canvas.</p>
-
-<p>“Lie still, fellows,” said Tom, as the other boys
-tried to wriggle out from under the tent. “We’ve
-got to get wet now, anyway; but perhaps, if we stay<span class="pagenum" id="Page_49">[49]</span>
-as we are, we can manage to keep the blankets
-dry.”</p>
-
-<p>The wet tent felt miserably cold as it clung to
-their heads and shoulders, but the boys kept under
-it, and held their blankets and spare shirts wrapped
-tightly in their arms. Luckily the storm was nearly
-at an end when the tent blew down, and a few
-moments later the rain ceased, and the crew of the
-<i>Whitewing</i>, in a very damp condition, crept out and
-congratulated themselves that they had escaped with
-no worse injury than a wet skin.</p>
-
-<p>“Where are your rubber blankets?” asked Harry,
-presently.</p>
-
-<p>“Rolled up with the other blankets,” answered
-everybody.</p>
-
-<p>“It won’t do to tell when we get home,” remarked
-Harry, “that, instead of using the water-proof blankets
-to keep ourselves dry, we used ourselves to keep
-the water-proofs dry. It’s the most stupid thing
-we’ve done yet; and I’m as bad as anybody else.”</p>
-
-<p>“It was a good deal worse to pitch a tent without<span class="pagenum" id="Page_50">[50]</span>
-digging a trench around it,” said Tom. “If I’d dug
-a trench two inches deep just back of that tent, not
-a drop of water would have run into it.”</p>
-
-<p>“And I don’t think much of the plan of using only
-four pins to hold a tent down when a hurricane is
-coming on,” said Joe.</p>
-
-<p>“And I think the least said by a fellow who carries
-two pounds of powder in his pocket in a thunder-storm
-the better,” added Jim.</p>
-
-<p>It took some time to bale the water out of the
-boat, for the rain and the spray from the river had
-half-filled it. But the shower had cooled the air,
-and the boys were glad to be at work again after
-their confinement in the tent. They were soon
-ready to start; and, rowing easily and steadily, they
-passed through the Highlands, and reached a nice
-camping spot on the east bank of the river below
-Poughkeepsie, before half-past five.</p>
-
-<p>This time they selected a place to pitch the tent
-with great care. It was easy to find the high-water
-mark on the shore, and the tent was pitched a little<span class="pagenum" id="Page_51">[51]</span>
-above it, so as to be safe from a disaster like that of
-the previous night. Harry wanted it pitched on the
-top of a high bank; but the others insisted that, as
-long as they were safe from the tide, there was no
-need of putting the tent a long distance from the
-water, and that they had selected the only spot
-where they could have a bed of sand to sleep on.</p>
-
-<p>This important business being settled, supper was
-the next subject of attention.</p>
-
-<p>“We haven’t been as regular about our meals as
-we ought to be,” said Harry, “but it hasn’t been our
-fault. We’ll have a good supper to-night, at any
-rate. How would you like some hot turtle-soup?”</p>
-
-<p>“Just the thing,” said Joe. “The bread is beginning
-to get a little dry; but we can soak it in the
-soup.”</p>
-
-<p>“About going for milk,” continued Harry; “we
-ought to arrange that and the other regular duties.
-Suppose after this we take regular turns. One fellow
-can pitch the tent, another can go for milk, another
-can get the firewood, and the other can cook.<span class="pagenum" id="Page_52">[52]</span>
-We can arrange it according to alphabetical order.
-For instance, Tom Schuyler pitches the tent to-night;
-Jim Sharpe goes for milk, Joe gets the firewood, and
-I cook. The next time we camp, Jim will pitch the
-tent, Joe will get the milk, I will get the wood, and
-Tom will cook. Is that fair?”</p>
-
-<p>The boys said it was, and they agreed to adopt
-Harry’s proposal. Jim went off with the milk-pail,
-and when the fire was ready, Harry took a can of
-soup and put it on the coals to be heated.</p>
-
-<p>Jim found a house quite near at hand, where he
-bought two quarts of milk and a loaf of bread, and
-was back again at the camp before the soup was
-ready. He found the boys lying near the fire, waiting
-for the soup to heat and the coffee to boil.</p>
-
-<p>“That soup takes a long time to heat through,”
-said Tom. “There isn’t a bit of steam coming out of
-it yet.”</p>
-
-<p>“How can any steam come out of it when it’s soldered
-up tight,” replied Harry.</p>
-
-<div class="figcenter" id="53a"><img src="images/i_052b.jpg" alt="THE SOUP EXPLOSION" /></div>
-<p class="caption">THE SOUP EXPLOSION.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_53">[53]</span>“You don’t mean to tell me that you’ve put the
-can on the fire without punching a hole in the
-top?”</p>
-
-<p>“Of course I have. What on earth should I
-punch a hole in it for?”</p>
-
-<p>“Because—” cried Tom, hastily springing up.</p>
-
-<p>But he was interrupted by a report like that of a
-small cannon: a cloud of ashes rose over the fire,
-and a shower of soup fell just where Tom had been
-lying.</p>
-
-<p>“That’s the reason why,” resumed Tom. “The
-steam has burst the can, and the soup has gone up.”</p>
-
-<p>“We’ve got another can,” said Harry, “and we’ll
-punch a hole in that one. What an idiot I was not
-to think of its bursting! It’s a good job that it
-didn’t hurt us. I should hate to have the newspapers
-say that we had been blown up and awfully
-mangled with soup.”</p>
-
-<p>The other can of soup was safely heated, and the
-boys made a comfortable supper. They drove a
-stake in the sand, and fastened the boat’s painter securely
-to it, and then “turned in.”</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_54">[54]</span>“No tide to rouse us up to-night, boys,” said Harry,
-as he rolled himself in his blanket. “I sha’n’t
-wake up till daylight.”</p>
-
-<p>“We’d better take an early start,” remarked Tom.
-“We haven’t got on very far because we started so
-late this morning. If we get off by six every morning,
-we can lie off in the middle of the day, and start
-again about three o’clock. It’s no fun rowing with
-the sun right overhead.”</p>
-
-<p>“Well, it isn’t more than eight o’clock now; and,
-if we take eight hours’ sleep, we can turn out at four
-o’clock,” said Harry. “But who is going to wake
-us up? Joe and Jim are sound asleep already, and
-I’m awful sleepy myself. I don’t believe one of us
-will wake up before seven o’clock anyway.”</p>
-
-<p>Tom made no answer, for he had dropped asleep
-while Harry was talking. The latter thought he
-must be pretending to sleep, and was just resolving
-to tell Tom that it wasn’t very polite to refuse to answer
-a civil question, when he found himself muttering
-something about a game of base-ball, and awoke,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_55">[55]</span>
-with a start, to discover that he could not possibly
-keep awake another moment.</p>
-
-<p>The boys slept on. The moon came out and
-shone in at the open tent-flap, and the tide rose to
-high-water mark, but not quite high enough to reach
-the tent. By-and-by the wheezing of a tow-boat
-broke the stillness, and occasionally a hoarse steam-whistle
-echoed among the hills; but the boys slept
-so soundly that they would not have heard a locomotive
-had it whistled its worst within a rod of
-the tent.</p>
-
-<p>The river had been like a mill-pond since the
-thunder-storm, but about midnight a heavy swell
-rolled in toward the shore. It came on, growing
-larger and larger, and, rushing up the little beach
-with a fierce roar, dashed into the tent and overwhelmed
-the sleeping boys without the slightest
-warning.</p>
-<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" />
-
-<div class="chapter">
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_56">[56]</span></p>
-
-<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_VI">CHAPTER VI.</h2>
-</div>
-
-<div>
- <img class="drop-cap" src="images/i_007.jpg" width="75" height="72" alt="T" />
-</div>
-
-<p class="drop-cap">THE wave receded as suddenly as it came.
-The boys sprang up in a terrible fright, and
-indeed there are few men who in their place
-would not have been frightened. The shock of
-the cold water was enough to startle the strongest
-nerves, and as the boys rushed to the door of the
-tent, in a blind race for life, they fully believed that
-their last hour had come. Before they could get
-out of the tent, a second wave swept up and rose
-above their knees. With wild cries of terror the
-two younger boys caught hold of Tom, and, losing
-their footing, dragged him down. Harry caught at
-Tom impulsively, with a vague idea of saving him
-from drowning, but the only result of his effort was
-that he went down with the rest. Fortunately the<span class="pagenum" id="Page_57">[57]</span>
-wave receded before the boys had time to drown,
-and left them struggling in a heap on the wet sand.
-There was no return of the water, and in a few moments
-the boys were outside of the tent and on the
-top of the bluff above the river.</p>
-
-<p>“It must have been a tidal wave,” said Jim. “Oh,
-I’d give anything if I was home! The water will
-come up again, and we’ll all be drowned!”</p>
-
-<p>“It was the swell of a steamboat,” said Tom.
-“There’s the boat now, just going around that
-point.”</p>
-
-<p>“You’re right,” said Harry. “It was nothing but
-the swell of the night-boat. What precious fools we
-were not to think of it before! To-morrow night
-we’ll pitch the tent about a thousand feet above the
-water.”</p>
-
-<p>“Then there’ll be a water-spout or something,”
-said Jim. “We’re bound to get wet whatever we
-do. We only started yesterday, and here we’ve
-been wet through three times.”</p>
-
-<p>“And Harry has been wet four times, counting<span class="pagenum" id="Page_58">[58]</span>
-the time he jumped in the Harlem for me,” added
-Joe.</p>
-
-<p>“It won’t do to stand here and talk about it,” said
-Tom. “We’ve got to have a fire or we’ll freeze to
-death. Look at the way Joe’s teeth are chattering.
-The blankets and clothes are all wet, and the sooner
-we dry them the sooner we’ll get warm.”</p>
-
-<div class="figcenter" id="58a"><img src="images/i_058a.jpg" alt="THE BOYS BUILT A ROARING FIRE ON A LARGE FLAT ROCK" /></div>
-<p class="caption">THE BOYS BUILT A ROARING FIRE ON A LARGE FLAT ROCK.</p>
-
-<p>There happened to be a dead tree near by, and it
-was soon converted into firewood. The boys built
-a roaring fire on a large flat rock, and after it had
-burnt for a little while they pushed it about six
-feet from the place where they had started it, and,
-after piling fresh fuel on it, laid down on the hot
-rock with their feet to the flames. The fire had
-heated the rock so that they could hardly bear to
-touch it, but the heat dried their wet clothes rapidly,
-and kept them from taking severe colds. Meanwhile
-their blankets had been spread out near the fire,
-and in half an hour were very nearly dry, and pretty
-severely scorched. Two large logs were then rolled
-on the fire, and when they were in a blaze the<span class="pagenum" id="Page_59">[59]</span>
-boys wrapped themselves in their blankets, and,
-lying as near to the fire as they could without
-actually burning, resumed their interrupted sleep.
-They found the rock rather a hard bed, and it offered
-no temptation to laziness; so it happened that
-they were all broad awake at half-past four; and
-though somewhat stiff from lying on a rocky bed,
-were none the worse for their night’s adventure.</p>
-
-<p>“There’s one thing I’m going to do this very day,”
-said Harry, as they were dressing themselves after
-their morning swim. “I’m going to write to the
-Department to send us a big rubber bag, that we
-can put our spare clothes in and keep them dry.
-There’s no fun in being wet and having nothing dry
-to put on.”</p>
-
-<p>“If we have the bag sent to Albany, it will get
-there by the time we do,” said Tom. “You write
-the letter while we are getting breakfast.”</p>
-
-<p>So Harry wrote to the Department as follows:</p>
-
-<div class="blockquot">
-
-<p>“<span class="smcap">Dear Uncle John</span>,—We’ve been wet through with a steamboat
-once, and the tide wet us the first night, and we got rained on,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_60">[60]</span>
-and I jumped in to get Joe out, and we’ve had a gorgeous time.
-Please send us a big water-proof bag to put our spare clothes in, so
-that we can have something dry. Please send it to Albany, and
-we will stop there at the post-office for it. Please send it right
-away. You said the Department furnished everything. We’ve
-been dry twice since we started, but it didn’t last long. There never
-was such fun. All the boys send their love to you. Please
-don’t forget the bag. From your affectionate nephew,</p>
-
-<p class="right">“<span class="smcap">Harry</span>.”</p>
-</div>
-
-<p>“This was the morning that you were going to
-sleep till eight o’clock without waking up, Harry,”
-said Tom, as they were eating their breakfast.</p>
-
-<p>“There’s nothing that will wake a fellow up so
-quick as the Hudson River rolling in on him. I
-hadn’t expected to wake up in that way,” answered
-Harry.</p>
-
-<p>“So far we have done nothing but find out how
-stupid we are,” said Tom. “Seems to me we must
-have found it pretty near all out by this time.
-There can’t be many more stupid things that we
-haven’t done.”</p>
-
-<p>“There won’t any accident happen to-night,” replied<span class="pagenum" id="Page_61">[61]</span>
-Harry; “for I’ll make sure that the tent is
-pitched so far from the water that we can’t be wet
-again. I wonder if every fellow learns to camp out
-by getting into scrapes as we do. It is very certain
-that we won’t forget what we learn on this cruise.”</p>
-
-<p>“I’m beginning to get tired of ham,” exclaimed
-Joe. “We’ve been eating ham ever since we started.
-Let’s get some eggs to-day.”</p>
-
-<p>“And some raspberries,” suggested Jim. “It’s
-the season for them.”</p>
-
-<p>“And let’s catch some fish,” said Tom.</p>
-
-<p>“That’s what we’ll do,” said Harry. “We’ll sail
-till eleven o’clock, and then we’ll go fishing and
-catch our dinner.”</p>
-
-<p>This suggestion pleased everybody; and when, at
-about six o’clock, they set sail with a nice breeze
-from the south, everybody kept a lookout for a
-good fishing-ground, and wondered why they had
-not thought of fishing before.</p>
-<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" />
-
-<div class="chapter">
-<span class="pagenum" id="Page_62">[62]</span>
-
-<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER VII.</h2>
-</div>
-
-<div>
- <img class="drop-cap" src="images/i_007.jpg" width="75" height="72" alt="T" />
-</div>
-
-<p class="drop-cap">THE sun was getting to be rather too hot for
-boating when the boys saw the half-sunken
-wreck of a canal-boat close to the west shore,
-where there was a nice shady grove. They immediately
-crossed the river, and, landing near the wreck,
-began to get their fishing-tackle in order.</p>
-
-<p>As there were only two poles, one of which belonged
-to Harry, and the other to Tom, the two
-Sharpe boys were obliged either to cut poles for
-themselves, or to watch the others while they fished.
-Jim cut a pole for himself, but Joe preferred to lie
-on the bank. “I don’t care to fish, anyhow,” he said.
-“I’ll agree to eat twice as much fish as anybody else,
-if I can be excused from fishing.”</p>
-
-<p>“If you don’t want to fish, you’d better hunt bait
-for us,” said Tom.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_63">[63]</span>“I never thought about bait,” exclaimed Harry.
-“How are we going to dig for worms without a
-spade?”</p>
-
-<p>“Who wants any worms?” replied Tom. “Grasshoppers
-are the thing; and the field just back of
-here is full of them. Come, Joe, catch us some grasshoppers,
-won’t you?”</p>
-
-<p>“How many do you want?” asked Joe. “I don’t
-want to waste good grasshoppers on fellows who
-won’t use them. Let’s see: suppose I get you ten
-grasshoppers apiece. Will that do?”</p>
-
-<p>“Are you getting lazy, Joe?” said Tom, “or are
-you sick? A fellow who don’t want to fish must
-have something wrong in his insides. Harry, you’d
-better give him some medicine.”</p>
-
-<p>“Oh, I’m all right,” replied Joe. “I’m a little
-sleepy to-day, but I’ll get your grasshoppers.”</p>
-
-<p>Joe took an empty tin can and went in search of
-grasshoppers, while the rest were getting their hooks
-and lines ready. In a short time he returned, and
-handed the can to Tom. “There’s just thirty-one<span class="pagenum" id="Page_64">[64]</span>
-grasshoppers in that can,” said he. “I threw in one
-for good measure. Now go ahead and fish, and I’ll
-have a nap.” So saying, he stretched himself on the
-ground, and the other boys began to fish.</p>
-
-<p>There were quantities of perch near the old canal-boat,
-and they bit ravenously at the grasshoppers.
-It took only about a quarter of an hour to catch
-nearly three dozen fish. These were more than the
-boys could possibly eat; and Tom was just going to
-remark that they had better stop fishing, when they
-were startled by a loud cry from Joe. Harry, in
-swinging his line over his head so as to cast out a
-long way into the river, had succeeded in hooking
-Joe in the right ear.</p>
-
-<div class="figcenter" id="64a"><img src="images/i_064a.jpg" alt="JOE IS CAUGHT" /></div>
-<p class="caption">JOE IS CAUGHT.</p>
-
-<p>Of course Harry was extremely sorry, and he said
-so several times; but, as Joe pointed out, “talk won’t
-pull a hook out of a fellow’s ear!” The barb made it
-impracticable to draw the hook out, and it was quite
-impossible that Joe should enjoy the cruise with a
-fish-hook in his ear. Jim said that the hook must
-be cut out; but Joe objected to having his ear cut<span class="pagenum" id="Page_65">[65]</span>
-to pieces with a dull jack-knife. In this emergency
-Tom proposed to break off the shank of the hook,
-and then to push the remainder of it through the
-ear. It was no easy matter, however, to break the
-steel. Every time the hook was touched, Joe
-winced with pain; but finally Tom managed to
-break the shank with the aid of the pair of pliers
-that formed part of the stores. The hook was then
-gently and firmly pressed through the ear, and carefully
-drawn out.</p>
-
-<p>“I knew,” said Tom, “that something must be
-wrong when Joe said he didn’t want to fish. This
-ought to be a warning to him.”</p>
-
-<p>“It’s a warning to me,” said Harry, “not to
-throw my line all over the State of New York.”</p>
-
-<p>“Oh, it’s all right now,” said Joe. “Only the
-next time I go cruising with Harry, I’m going to
-take a pair of cutting pincers to cut off the shanks
-of fish-hooks after he gets through fishing. We’d
-better get a pair at Hudson, anyhow, or else we’ll all
-be stuck full of hooks, if Harry does any more fishing.”</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_66">[66]</span>Harry was so humbled by the result of his carelessness
-that he offered, by way of penance, to clean
-and cook the fish. When this was done, and the
-fish were served up smoking hot, they were so good
-that Joe forgot his damaged ear, and Harry recovered
-his spirits. After a course of fish and bread, a
-can of peaches was opened for dessert, and then followed
-a good long rest. By three o’clock the heat
-began to lessen, and the <i>Whitewing</i> started on her
-way with a better breeze than she had yet been favored
-with.</p>
-
-<p>The boat travelled swiftly, and the breeze gradually
-freshened. The whitecaps were beginning to
-make their appearance on the river before it occurred
-to the boys that they must cross over to the east
-shore, in order to camp where they could find shade
-while getting breakfast the next morning. It had
-been one of Uncle John’s most earnest bits of advice
-that they should always have shade in the morning.
-“Nothing spoils the temper,” he had said, “like cooking
-under a bright sun; so make sure that you keep<span class="pagenum" id="Page_67">[67]</span>
-in the shade until after breakfast.” Harry felt a little
-nervous about crossing the river in so fresh a
-breeze, since, as the breeze blew from the south, the
-boat could not sail directly across the river without
-bringing the sea on her beam. He did not mention
-that he was nervous, however, and he showed excellent
-judgment in crossing the river diagonally, so as
-to avoid exposing the broadside of the boat to the
-waves, that by this time were unpleasantly high.
-The east bank was thus reached without taking a
-drop of water into the boat, and she was then kept
-on her course up the river, within a few rods of the
-shore.</p>
-
-<p>This was a wise precaution in one respect; for, if
-the boat had capsized, the boys could easily have
-swum ashore; but still it is always risky to keep
-close to the shore, unless you know that there are no
-rocks or snags in the way. Harry never thought
-of the danger of being shipwrecked with the shore
-so close at hand, and was enjoying the cooling breeze
-and the speed of the boat, when suddenly the <i>Whitewing</i><span class="pagenum" id="Page_68">[68]</span>
-brought up with a crash that pitched everybody
-into the bottom of the boat. She had struck
-a sunken rock, and the speed at which she was going
-was so great that one of her planks was stove in.
-Before the boys could pick themselves up, the water
-had rushed in, and was rising rapidly. “Jump overboard,
-everybody!” cried Harry. “She won’t float
-with us in her.” There was no time in which to
-pull off shirts and trousers, and the boys plunged
-overboard without even taking their hats off. They
-then took hold of the boat, two on each side of her,
-and swam toward the shore. With so much water
-in her, the boat was tremendously heavy; but the
-boys persevered, and finally reached shallow water,
-where they could wade and drag her out on the sand.</p>
-
-<p>“Here we are wet again!” exclaimed Jim. “The
-blankets are wet, too, this time.”</p>
-
-<p>“Never mind,” replied Tom. “It’s not more
-than five o’clock, and we can get them dry before
-night.”</p>
-
-<p>“We’ll have to work pretty fast, then,” said Harry.<span class="pagenum" id="Page_69">[69]</span>
-“Jim and Joe had better build a big fire and
-dry the things, while you and I empty the boat; or
-I’ll empty the boat, and you can pitch the tent.
-We’ll have to put off supper till we can make sure
-of a dry bed.”</p>
-
-<p>Harry took the things out of the boat one by one.
-Everything was wet except the contents of the tin
-boxes, into which the water luckily had not penetrated.
-As soon as the fire was built, Jim and Joe
-gave their whole attention to drying the blankets
-and the spare clothing; and when the boat was emptied,
-it was found that a hole nearly six inches long
-and four inches wide had been made through one
-of the bottom planks. Harry and Tom set to work
-to mend it. They took a piece of canvas—which
-had luckily been kept in one of the tin boxes and
-was quite dry—and tacked it neatly over the outside
-of the hole. They next covered the canvas with
-a thin coating of white-lead, except at the edges,
-where the white-lead was laid on very thickly.
-Over the canvas the piece of zinc that had been<span class="pagenum" id="Page_70">[70]</span>
-brought for just such a purpose was carefully tacked,
-and then thin strips of wood were placed over
-the edges of the tin, and screwed down tightly with
-screws that went through the zinc, but not through
-the canvas. Finally, white-lead was put all around
-the outer edge of the zinc, and the boat was then
-left bottom-side up on the sand, so that the white-lead
-could harden by exposure to the air.</p>
-
-<p>Nobody cared to go for milk in wet clothes; and
-so, when the boat was mended, the boys all sat
-around the fire to dry themselves, and made a supper
-of crackers. What with the heat and the wind,
-it was not very long before their clothes and blankets
-were thoroughly dried; and they could look forward
-to a comfortable night. The tent was pitched
-where no steamboat swell could possibly touch it,
-and the boat was apparently out of reach of the tide.
-It was very early when the boys “turned in,” and
-for the first time in the cruise they slept peacefully
-all night.</p>
-<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" />
-
-<div class="chapter">
-<span class="pagenum" id="Page_71">[71]</span>
-
-<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER VIII.</h2>
-</div>
-
-<div>
- <img class="drop-cap" src="images/i_007.jpg" width="75" height="72" alt="T" />
-</div>
-
-<p class="drop-cap">THE next morning the boys awoke early,
-having had a thoroughly good night’s rest.
-Tom, whose turn it was to go for milk, found
-a well-stocked farm-house, where he obtained not
-only milk, bread, and eggs, but a supply of butter
-and a chicken all ready for cooking. After breakfast
-the boat was put in the water, and, to the delight
-of all, proved to be almost as tight as she was
-before running into the rock. A little water came
-in at first under the edges of the zinc, but in a short
-time the wood swelled, and the leak entirely ceased.</p>
-
-<p>The boat was loaded, and the boys were ready to
-start soon after six o’clock. There was no wind, but
-the two long oars, pulled one by Tom and the other
-by Jim, sent her along at a fine rate. They rowed<span class="pagenum" id="Page_72">[72]</span>
-until ten o’clock, resting occasionally for a few moments,
-and then, as there were no signs of a breeze,
-and as it was growing excessively hot, they went
-ashore, to wait until afternoon before resuming their
-journey.</p>
-
-<p>The sun became hotter and hotter. The boys
-tried to fish, but there was no shade near the bank
-of the river, and it was too hot to stand or sit in
-the sunshine and wait for fish to bite. They went
-in swimming, but the sun, beating on their heads,
-seemed hotter while they were in the water than it
-did when they were on the land. Jim and Joe tried
-a game of mumble-to-peg, but they gave it up long
-before they had reached “ears.” It was probably the
-hottest day of the year; and as it was clearly impossible
-to row or to do anything else while the heat
-lasted, the boys brought their blankets from the
-boat, and, going to a grove not far from the shore, lay
-down and fell asleep.</p>
-
-<div class="figcenter" id="72a"><img src="images/i_072a.jpg" alt="MUMBLE-THE-PEG" /></div>
-<p class="caption">MUMBLE-THE-PEG.</p>
-
-<p>They were astonished to find, when they awoke,
-that it was two o’clock. None of them had been accustomed<span class="pagenum" id="Page_73">[73]</span>
-to sleep in the daytime, and they could not
-understand how it came about that they had all slept
-for fully two hours. They had yet to learn that one
-of the results of “camping out,” or living in the
-open air, is an ability to sleep at almost any time.
-All animals and wild creatures, whether they are
-beasts or savages, have this happy faculty of sleeping
-in the daytime. It is one of the habits of our
-savage ancestors that comes back to us when we
-abandon civilization, and live as Aryan tribes, from
-whom we are descended, lived in the Far East, before
-they marched with their wives and children and cattle
-from India, and made themselves new homes in
-Europe.</p>
-
-<p>After lunch the boys prepared to start, although
-there was still no wind; but when they went down
-to the boat they found that the sun was as hot as
-ever. So they returned to the shade of the grove,
-and made up their minds to stay there until the end
-of the afternoon.</p>
-
-<p>“Harry,” said Tom, “we’ve been on the river<span class="pagenum" id="Page_74">[74]</span>
-three days, and we are only a little way above Hudson.
-How much longer will it be before we get to
-Albany?”</p>
-
-<p>“We ought to get there in two days more, even
-if we have to row all the way,” replied Harry.</p>
-
-<p>“And after we get to Albany, what are we to do
-next?”</p>
-
-<p>“We are going up the Champlain Canal to Fort
-Edward. There we will have a wagon to carry us
-and the boat to Warrensburg, on the Schroon River,
-and will go up the river to Schroon Lake. Uncle
-John laid out the route for us.”</p>
-
-<p>“How many days will it take us to get to the
-lake?” asked Tom.</p>
-
-<p>Harry thought awhile. “There’s two days more
-on the Hudson, two on the canal, and maybe two
-on the Schroon River. And then there’s a Sunday,
-which don’t count. It’ll be just a week before we
-get to the lake.”</p>
-
-<p>“I’ve got to be home by two weeks from next
-Monday,” continued Tom, “so I sha’n’t have much<span class="pagenum" id="Page_75">[75]</span>
-time on the lake. Can’t we get along a little faster?
-There’s a full-moon to-night, and suppose we sail all
-night—or row, if the wind doesn’t come up.”</p>
-
-<p>“That’s a first-rate idea,” exclaimed Harry. “We
-can take turns sleeping in the bottom of the boat.
-Why, if the breeze comes up in the night, we might
-make twenty or thirty miles before morning.”</p>
-
-<p>All the boys liked the plan of sailing at night,
-and they resolved to adopt it. While they were yet
-discussing it, a light breeze sprang up, from the
-south as usual, and they hastened to take advantage
-of it. In the course of an hour more the sun began
-to lose its power; and when they went ashore at six
-o’clock to cook their supper, they had sailed about
-fifteen miles.</p>
-
-<p>As they expected to make so much progress during
-the night, they were in no hurry about supper,
-and it was not until after seven o’clock that they
-again made sail. Harry divided the crew into
-watches—one consisting of himself and Joe Sharpe,
-and the other of Tom and Jim. Each watch was to<span class="pagenum" id="Page_76">[76]</span>
-have charge of the boat for three hours, while the
-other watch slept. At eight o’clock Tom and Jim
-lay down in the bottom of the boat, and Joe came
-aft to take Tom’s customary place at the sheet.
-Harry, of course, steered.</p>
-
-<p>All went well. The breeze was light but steady,
-and Harry kept the boat in the middle of the river
-to avoid another shipwreck. The watch below did
-not sleep much, for they had had a long nap at
-noon, and, besides, the novelty of their position made
-them wakeful. They had just dropped asleep when
-eleven o’clock arrived, and they were awakened to
-relieve the other watch. Tom went sleepily to the
-helm, and Harry and Joe gladly “turned in,” and
-were soon fast asleep.</p>
-
-<p>Tom always declares that he never closed his eyes
-while he was at the helm, and Jim also asserts that
-he was wide awake during his entire watch, though
-neither he nor Tom spoke for fear of waking up the
-other boys. It was strange that these two wide-awake
-young Moral Pirates did not notice that a<span class="pagenum" id="Page_77">[77]</span>
-large steamboat—one of the Albany night-boats—was
-in sight, until she was within a mile of them,
-and it is just possible that, without knowing it, they
-were a little too drowsy to keep a proper lookout.</p>
-
-<p>As soon as Tom saw the steamboat, he remarked,
-“Halloo! there’s one of the Albany boats,” and
-steered the boat over toward the east shore. The
-breeze had nearly died away, and the <i>Whitewing</i>
-moved very slowly. The steamboat came rapidly
-down the river, her paddles throbbing loudly in the
-night air. Jim began to get a little uneasy, and
-said, “I hope she won’t run us down.” “Oh, there’s
-no danger!” replied Tom; “we shall get out of her
-way easy enough.” But, to his dismay, the steamboat,
-instead of keeping in the middle of the river,
-presently turned toward the east shore, as if she were
-bent upon running down the <i>Whitewing</i>. Tom was
-now really alarmed; and as he saw that the sail was
-doing very little good, he hurriedly told Jim to take
-down the mast and get out the oars as quick as
-possible. Jim rapidly obeyed the order, dropping<span class="pagenum" id="Page_78">[78]</span>
-the mast on Harry’s head, and catching Joe by the
-nose in his search for the oars. By this time Tom
-had begun to hail the steamboat at the top of his
-lungs; but no attention was paid to him by the
-steamboat men, since the noise of the paddles drowned
-Tom’s voice. Harry and Joe, who were now
-wide awake, saw what danger they were in, and they
-sprang to the oars. The steamboat was frightfully
-near, and still hugging the shore; but Tom called
-on the boys to give way with their oars, and steered
-straight for the shore, knowing that there must be
-room for the boat between the steamboat and the
-bank of the river, and fearing that if he steered in
-the opposite direction the steamboat might change
-her course and run them down, when they would
-have little chance of escape by swimming.</p>
-
-<p>It was certainly very doubtful if they could avoid
-the steamboat, and Tom was well aware of it. He
-told the other boys that, if they were sure to be run
-down, they must jump before the steamboat struck
-them, and dive, so as to escape the paddles. “I’ll tell<span class="pagenum" id="Page_79">[79]</span>
-you when to jump, if worst comes to worst,” said he;
-“but don’t you look around now, nor do anything but
-row. Row for your lives, boys.” And the boys did
-row gallantly. Harry had a pair of sculls, and Jim
-had a long oar, and between them they made the
-boat fly through the water. As they neared the
-shore, it seemed to them that there was not more
-than three feet of space between the steamboat and
-the land; and Tom had almost made up his mind
-that the cruise was coming to a sudden end, when the
-great steamboat swung her head around, and drew out
-toward the middle of the river. She did not seem
-to be more than a rod from them as she changed
-her course, though in reality she was probably much
-farther off. At the same moment the <i>Whitewing</i>
-reached what appeared to be the shore, but what
-was really a long row of piles projecting about a
-foot above the water. The boys had just ceased
-rowing, and Tom had given the boat a sheer with
-the rudder, so as to bring her along-side of the piles,
-when the steamboat’s swell, which the boys, in their<span class="pagenum" id="Page_80">[80]</span>
-excitement over their narrow escape, had totally forgotten,
-came rushing up, seized the boat, and threw
-it over the piles into a shallow and muddy lagoon.</p>
-
-<p>It was almost miraculous that the boat was not
-capsized; but she was actually lifted up and thrown
-over the piles, without taking more than a few quarts
-of spray into her. When they saw that they were
-absolutely safe, the boys began to wonder how in
-the world they could get the boat back into the
-river, and Jim proposed to light the lantern and see
-if anything was missing out of the boat, and if she
-had been injured.</p>
-
-<p>“Now I see why the steamboat did not notice us,”
-exclaimed Tom.</p>
-
-<p>“Why?” asked all the others together.</p>
-
-<p>“Because,” he replied, “we have been such everlasting
-idiots as to sail at night without showing a
-light.”</p>
-
-<div class="figcenter" id="81a"><img src="images/i_080b.jpg" alt="LIFTING THE BOAT OVER THE PILES" /></div>
-<p class="caption">LIFTING THE BOAT OVER THE PILES.</p>
-
-<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" />
-
-<div class="chapter">
-<span class="pagenum" id="Page_81">[81]</span>
-
-<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER IX.</h2>
-</div>
-
-<div>
- <img class="drop-cap" src="images/i_007.jpg" width="75" height="72" alt="T" />
-</div>
-
-<p class="drop-cap">THE boat was in a shallow part of the river,
-between the shore and a long row of piles
-that marked the steamboat channel. Harry
-sounded with an oar, and found that the water was
-only two feet deep. “We’ll have to get overboard
-and drag the boat over the piles,” said he, “and it’s
-going to be a mighty hard job, too. That swell
-threw us over as neat as the bull threw Joe over
-the fence up at Lenox last summer.”</p>
-
-<p>“When I got pitched over that fence I stayed
-there,” said Joe. “I didn’t try to get back into the
-field where the bull was, and I don’t see what we
-want to get back where the steamboats are for.”</p>
-
-<p>“That’s so,” exclaimed Harry. “We’re safe
-enough here. Let’s get the water out of the boat,
-and keep on this side of the piles.”</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_82">[82]</span>When the boat was made dry, and the lighted lantern
-was hoisted to the top of the mast, Tom resumed
-his place at the helm, and Harry and Joe prepared
-to take another nap. “I don’t want to grumble,”
-said Joe, “but I wish I didn’t have to lie on
-the coffee-pot and a tin cup. I don’t feel comfortable
-on that kind of bed.”</p>
-
-<p>“I’ll change with you if you like,” replied Harry.
-“I’m sleeping on a beautiful soft bottle of oil, and
-some sardine boxes, but I don’t want to be selfish
-and keep the best bed for myself.”</p>
-
-<p>“Oh, never mind,” returned Joe. “I’ll manage to
-sleep if Jim don’t step on my face. I always did
-hate to have anybody step on my face when I was
-asleep.”</p>
-
-<p>“Well, good-night everybody,” said Harry. “I’m
-going straight to sleep. Tom, be sure you wake me
-up if a steamboat tries to climb over these piles.”</p>
-
-<p>This time Tom did not fall asleep at the helm, but
-the wind gradually died away, and the sail hung
-limp and useless. Jim got out the oars without<span class="pagenum" id="Page_83">[83]</span>
-stepping on anybody, and rowed slowly on. In a
-little while they came to the end of the shallow lagoon
-into which the swell had so unexpectedly cast
-them. A sand-bank stretched from the shore to the
-line of piles, and it was impossible to go any farther.
-Tom decided to make the boat fast to the limb of a
-willow-tree that projected over the water, and to go
-ashore and sleep on the sand. Neither he nor Jim
-thought it worth while to wake the other boys; so
-they gathered up their blankets, crept quietly out of
-the boat, and were soon asleep on the soft, warm
-sand. When Harry and Joe awoke at daylight,
-stiff and cramped, they were disposed to be rather
-indignant at Tom and Jim, who were sleeping so
-comfortably on the sand; but Tom soon convinced
-them that he had acted from the best of motives,
-and they readily forgave him.</p>
-
-<p>Of course breakfast was the first business of the
-day, and after that was finished the boat had to be
-entirely unloaded before she could be lifted over the
-piles into the channel. For the first time since they<span class="pagenum" id="Page_84">[84]</span>
-had started on the cruise the breeze was ahead, but
-it was so light that it was of very little consequence.
-The sky was cloudy, and the day promised to be a
-cool one; so the boys resolved to take to their oars
-and try, if possible, to reach Albany before night.
-When the boat was loaded, Tom and Jim each took
-a long oar, and Harry took his usual seat in the
-stern-sheets. They all felt fresh in spite of their
-night’s adventure, and started gayly on their intended
-long day’s row.</p>
-
-<p>By this time they had found out that, although
-round tin boxes were very well to keep things dry,
-they are by no means handy to carry in a boat.
-Their shape made it impossible to stow them compactly.
-Joe, who sat at the bow, always had to pick
-his way over these tin boxes in going to or coming
-from his station; and he was constantly catching his
-foot in the spaces left between the boxes, and falling
-down on them. This smashed in the covers, and
-tried Joe’s temper sorely. Once he sat down so violently
-on the box which held the sugar, that he went<span class="pagenum" id="Page_85">[85]</span>
-completely through the cover, and was fastened in
-the box as securely as a cork in a bottle. He was
-only released after a great deal of work, and just in
-time to enable the boys to have sugar in their coffee
-at night. Harry resolved that he would never cruise
-again with round boxes, but would have small rubber
-bags made, in which to put everything that required
-to be kept dry.</p>
-
-<p>The boys took turns at the oars every hour, and
-rowed steadily until noon. They gave themselves
-an hour for lunch and resting, and then resumed
-their work. Late in the afternoon they came in
-sight of Albany, and went ashore, so as to get their
-dinner before reaching the city. After dinner they
-again pulled away at the oars, and at about nine
-o’clock they stopped at a lumber-yard on the outskirts
-of Albany, and, creeping in among the lumber,
-wrapped their blankets around them, and dropped
-asleep, completely worn out, but proud of their
-long day’s row.</p>
-
-<p>Before sunrise the next morning, Tom was awakened<span class="pagenum" id="Page_86">[86]</span>
-by a stick which was thrust into his ribs. Without
-opening his eyes, he muttered, “You quit that,
-or I’ll get up and pound you!” and immediately
-dropped asleep again. Somebody then kicked him
-so sharply that he roused himself up, and, opening
-his eyes, was dazzled by the gleam of a bull’s-eye
-lantern. He could not at first imagine where he
-was; but, as he presently found that a big policeman
-had him by the collar, and was calling him “an impudent
-young thief,” he began to imagine that something
-was wrong.</p>
-
-<p>“I’ve got you this time,” said the policeman, “and
-the whole gang of you. Where did you steal that
-property in your boat from, you precious young river
-pirate?”</p>
-
-<p>“We’re not river pirates,” replied Tom. “We’re
-Moral Pirates, and we brought those things in the
-boat with us from New York.”</p>
-
-<p>“Well, I like your cheek!” said the officer;
-“owning up that you’re pirates. Now just you and
-your gang take everything out of that boat and let<span class="pagenum" id="Page_87">[87]</span>
-me see what you’ve got. If any of you try to escape,
-I’ll put a bullet into you. You hear me?”</p>
-
-<p>The other boys had been awakened by the loud
-voice of the policeman, and were staring at him in
-utter astonishment.</p>
-
-<p>“He thinks we’re river thieves,” said Tom. “Harry,
-we’ll have to show him what we’ve got in the
-boat, and then he’ll see his mistake.”</p>
-
-<p>Harry eagerly assured the policeman that they
-had come from New York on a pleasure cruise, and
-had nothing in the boat except provisions and stores.
-“That’s a pretty story,” said the officer. “You can
-tell that to the court. Your boat’s full of junk
-that you’ve stolen from somewhere; and you’d better
-hand it out mighty quick!”</p>
-
-<p>The boys were thus compelled to unload their
-boat, while the policeman stood over them with his
-club in one hand and his lantern in the other. He
-was not a stupid man, and he soon perceived that
-the boys had told him the truth; they were not the
-gang of river thieves for whom he had mistaken<span class="pagenum" id="Page_88">[88]</span>
-them. He therefore apologized, in a rough way,
-and even helped the boys repack the boat.</p>
-
-<p>“What I can’t understand,” said he, “is why you
-boys come here and sleep in a lumber-yard, when
-you might be sleeping at home in your beds. Now
-if you were thieves, you couldn’t get any better lodgings,
-you know; but you’re gentlemen’s sons, and
-you ought to know better. Why don’t you go
-down to the hotel and live like gentlemen? Where’s
-the fun in being arrested, and taking up my valuable
-time?”</p>
-
-<p>The boys assured him that they had never enjoyed
-themselves more than they had while on the cruise,
-and after a little more talk the officer turned slowly
-away.</p>
-
-<p>“By-the-bye,” he exclaimed, suddenly turning back
-again, “one of you told me you were pirates. I ought
-to take you in after all. I believe you’re a lot of
-boys that have been reading dime novels, and have
-run away from home.”</p>
-
-<p>“I didn’t say we were pirates,” replied Tom. “I<span class="pagenum" id="Page_89">[89]</span>
-said we were Moral Pirates. That’s a very different
-thing.”</p>
-
-<p>“Of course it is,” said Joe. “A Moral Pirate is a
-sort of missionary, you know. I’m afraid you don’t
-go to Sunday-school, officer, or you’d know better.”</p>
-
-<p>The policeman could not quite make up his mind
-whether Joe was in joke or in earnest; but as he
-could find no real reason for arresting the boys, he
-contented himself with telling them to leave the
-lumber-yard as soon as the sun rose. “And you’d
-better look out,” he added, “that you don’t come
-across any real river thieves. They’ll make no bones
-of seizing your boat, and knocking you on the head
-if you make any noise.” When he was fairly out of
-sight, the boys crept back to their shelter among the
-lumber, and coolly went to sleep again. They were
-so tired that neither policemen nor river thieves had
-any terrors for them.</p>
-<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" />
-
-<div class="chapter">
-<span class="pagenum" id="Page_90">[90]</span>
-
-<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER X.</h2>
-</div>
-
-<div>
- <img class="drop-cap" src="images/i_007.jpg" width="75" height="72" alt="T" />
-</div>
-
-<p class="drop-cap">THE policeman did not return, and the boys
-slept until an hour after sunrise. They then
-rowed down the river to the steamboat landing,
-where they left their boat in charge of a boatman
-and went to a hotel for breakfast. The waiters
-were rather astonished at the tremendous appetites
-displayed by the four sunburnt boys, and there is no
-doubt that the landlord lost money that morning.
-After breakfast Harry went to the express office,
-where he found a large water-proof India-rubber bag,
-which the Department had sent in answer to his letter.
-At the post-office were letters from home for
-all the boys, and a postal order for ten dollars from
-Uncle John for the use of the expedition. Harry
-had no idea that this money would be needed, but it
-subsequently proved to be very useful.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_91">[91]</span>Quite a quantity of stores were bought at Albany,
-for the voyage up the Hudson had lasted longer
-than any one had supposed it would, and the provisions
-were getting low. No unnecessary time was
-spent in buying these stores, for a fair wind was
-blowing, and all the boys were anxious to take advantage
-of it. By ten o’clock they were again afloat;
-and soon after noon they reached Troy and entered
-the canal.</p>
-
-<p>The canal basin was crowded with canal-boats,
-and to avoid accidents the <i>Whitewing’s</i> mast was
-taken down, and the oars were got out. Harry
-knew that, in order to pass through the locks, it
-would be necessary to pay toll, and to procure an
-order from the canal authorities directing the lockmen
-to permit the <i>Whitewing</i> to pass. The canal-boatmen, of
-whom he made inquiries, told him where
-to find the office, which was some little distance up
-the canal. When the office was reached, an officer
-came and inspected the boat, asked a great many
-questions about the cruise up the Hudson, and seemed<span class="pagenum" id="Page_92">[92]</span>
-to be very much interested in the expedition. He
-told the boys that the water was low in the Champlain
-Canal, and that the lockmen might not be willing
-to open the locks for so small a boat; but that
-they could avoid all dispute by entering the locks at
-the same time with some one of the many canal-boats
-that were on their way north. He charged
-the <i>Whitewing</i> the enormous sum of twenty-five
-cents for tolls, and gave Harry an important-looking
-order by which the lockmen were directed to allow
-the skiff <i>Whitewing</i>, Captain Harry Wilson, to pass
-through all the locks on the canal.</p>
-
-<div class="figcenter" id="93a"><img src="images/i_092b.jpg" alt="GOING THROUGH THE LOCK" /></div>
-<p class="caption">GOING THROUGH THE LOCK.</p>
-
-<p>Thanking the pleasant officer, the boys pushed off.
-After they had passed the place where the Champlain
-Canal branches off from the Erie Canal, they
-were no longer troubled by a crowd of canal-boats,
-and were able to set the sail again. Unluckily, the
-mast was just a little too high to pass under the
-bridges, and at the first bridge which they met they
-narrowly escaped a capsize—Jim succeeding in getting
-the mast down only just in time to save it from<span class="pagenum" id="Page_93">[93]</span>
-striking the bridge. They had hardly set sail again
-when another bridge came in sight, and they could
-see just beyond it a third bridge. It would never
-do to stop at every bridge and unship the mast; so
-Harry went on shore, borrowed a saw from a cooper’s
-shop, and sawed six inches off from the top of
-the mast, after which the bridges gave them no more
-trouble.</p>
-
-<p>The boys were very much interested in passing
-the first lock. They slipped into the lock behind a
-big canal-boat, which left just room enough between
-its rudder and the gate for the <i>Whitewing</i>. When
-the lockmen shut the gate behind the boat, and opened
-the sluices in the upper gate, the water rose slowly
-and steadily. The sides of the lock were so steep
-and black that the boys felt very much as if they
-were at the bottom of a well; but it was not many
-minutes before the water had risen so high that the
-upper gates were opened, and the big canal-boat and
-its little follower were released.</p>
-
-<p>Passing through a lock in a small boat, and in<span class="pagenum" id="Page_94">[94]</span>
-company with a canal-boat, is not a perfectly safe
-thing to do; for if the ropes which fasten the canal-boat
-should break—which they sometimes do—the
-water rushing in through the sluices would force the
-canal-boat against the lower gate, and crush the small
-boat like an egg-shell. It is therefore best always
-to pass through a lock alone, or in company with
-other small boats. The danger, however, is in reality
-very slight, and very few accidents occur in canal
-locks.</p>
-
-<p>The wind died away before sunset; and the boys
-having had only a light lunch, which they ate on
-the boat, were glad to go ashore for supper. They
-bought some corn from a farmer, and roasted it before
-the fire, while some nice slices of ham were frying,
-and the coffee-pot was boiling, and so prepared a
-supper which they greatly enjoyed. The moon came
-up before they had finished the meal, and they felt
-strongly tempted to make another attempt at night-work.</p>
-
-<p>“I’ll tell you what we can do,” exclaimed Harry.<span class="pagenum" id="Page_95">[95]</span>
-“Instead of rowing, let’s tow the boat. One fellow
-can tow while another steers, and the rest can sleep
-in the boat.”</p>
-
-<p>“All right,” said Joe. “I’m willing to be a mule.
-Only I’d like to know where my harness is coming
-from.”</p>
-
-<p>“We’ve got rope enough for that,” replied Harry.
-“I’ll take the first turn, and tow for an hour, while
-Joe steers; then I’ll steer for an hour, while Joe
-tows. Then the other watch will take charge of the
-boat for two hours, and Joe and I will sleep.”</p>
-
-<p>“If I’m to sleep on the bottom of that boat,” said
-Joe, “I want some nice sharp stones to sleep on. I’m
-tired of sleeping on coffee-pots, and want a change.”</p>
-
-<p>A long tow-line was soon rigged on Harry’s shoulders
-in such a way that it did not chafe him; a
-space in the bottom of the boat was cleared of coffee-pots
-and other uncomfortable articles, and a pair of
-blankets was spread on the bottom board, so as to
-make a comfortable bed, which Tom and Jim hastened
-to occupy. Joe took the yoke-lines in his hand,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_96">[96]</span>
-and called to Harry to go ahead. When Harry first
-tugged at the tow-line, the boat seemed very heavy;
-but as soon as she was in motion, Harry found that
-he could tow her as fast as he could walk, and without
-any difficulty.</p>
-
-<p>Had the locks been open and the canal-boats been
-out of the way, the experiment of towing the <i>Whitewing</i>
-at night would have been very successful. As
-it happened, the locks were kept closed during the
-night, because the water was low; and the canal-boats,
-not being able to pass the locks, were moored
-to the tow-path. These boats gave Harry and Joe
-a great deal of trouble. When one of them was
-met, Harry had to unharness himself and toss the
-rope into the boat, and Joe had to get out an oar
-and scull around the obstacle. This happened so
-often that Tom and Jim got very little sleep; and
-long before it was time for them to resume duty, a
-lock was reached, and Harry had to call all hands
-to drag the boat around it.</p>
-
-<p>This was a hard piece of work. First, all the<span class="pagenum" id="Page_97">[97]</span>
-heavy things had to be taken out of the boat and
-carried around the lock. Then the boat had to
-be dragged out of the canal on to the tow-path;
-hauled up a steep ascent, and launched above the
-upper gate. It took a good half-hour to pass the
-first of these closed locks, and when the boat was
-again ready to start, it was time to change the watch.</p>
-
-<p>Tom and Jim had managed to get only a few minutes’
-sleep, but Harry and Joe could not sleep a single
-wink. They had not “turned in” for more than
-ten minutes, when another lock was reached. This
-involved a second half-hour of hard work by all
-hands, and twenty minutes later three more locks
-close together blocked the way. It was foolish to
-persevere in dragging the boat around locks all
-night long; so, after getting her out of the canal on
-the side opposite to the tow-path, the boys dragged
-her behind some bushes, where the canal-boatmen
-could not see her at daylight. They then spread their
-rubber blankets on the ground, and prepared to sleep
-through the remaining four or five hours of darkness.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_98">[98]</span>“Boys,” said Joe, suddenly, “does it hurt a fat
-woman to jump on her?”</p>
-
-<p>“Don’t know,” answered Harry. “What do you
-ask for?”</p>
-
-<p>“Oh, nothing,” said Joe. “Only when I was
-jumping from one canal-boat to another while I was
-a mule, I landed awfully heavy on a fat woman who
-was sleeping on deck.”</p>
-
-<p>“What did she do?” asked Harry.</p>
-
-<p>“She didn’t do anything. She just said ‘Go
-way wid you now, Pathrick,’ as if she was half
-asleep and dreaming. Pathrick must be in the
-habit of jumping on her.”</p>
-
-<p>“Well, if she likes it, that’s her business, not
-yours,” suggested Harry. “Go to sleep, do!”</p>
-
-<p>“I am going to sleep; but I don’t think we ought
-to spend our nights in getting run down by steamboats
-and jumping on strange fat women. I’m sure
-it isn’t right. There, you needn’t throw any more
-shoes at me! I won’t say another word.”</p>
-<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" />
-
-<div class="chapter">
-<span class="pagenum" id="Page_99">[99]</span>
-
-<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER XI.</h2>
-</div>
-
-<div>
- <img class="drop-cap" src="images/i_099.jpg" width="75" height="74" alt="B" />
-</div>
-
-<p class="drop-cap">BOYS,” said Tom, as he was kindling the
-fire the next morning, “do you know what
-day it is?”</p>
-
-<p>“Saturday, of course,” replied the others.</p>
-
-<p>“You’re wrong; it’s Sunday.”</p>
-
-<p>“It can’t be,” exclaimed Harry.</p>
-
-<p>“But it is,” persisted Tom. “Last night was
-the sixth night that we’ve slept out-doors, and we
-started on a Monday.”</p>
-
-<p>Tom was right; but it was some time before his
-companions could convince themselves that it was
-actually Sunday. When they finally admitted that
-it was Sunday morning, they gave up the idea of
-proceeding up the canal, and began to discuss what
-they had better do.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_100">[100]</span>The boat, which had been drawn out of the water
-the night before, was concealed by a clump of bushes
-from the canal-boatmen. The boys decided to leave
-it where it was, and to carry the tent and most of
-their baggage to a grove a quarter of a mile distant,
-where they could pass a quiet Sunday. The locks
-were not yet opened, and no canal-boats were stirring,
-and the boys made their way to the grove at
-once while their movements were unobserved. They
-were afraid that if they attracted the attention of
-the boatmen to the clump of bushes some one would
-steal the <i>Whitewing</i> while her crew were absent.
-They had already seen enough of the “canalers” to
-know that they were a wild and lawless set of men,
-and they were not anxious to put the temptation of
-stealing a nice boat in their way.</p>
-
-<p>The grove was a delightful place; and when they
-had pitched the tent under the shadow of the great
-oak-trees, they were glad of the prospect of a good
-day’s rest. Tom and Harry walked nearly a mile to
-church in the morning, leaving the Sharpe boys to<span class="pagenum" id="Page_101">[101]</span>
-look after the camp, and they all slept most of the
-afternoon.</p>
-
-<p>About dusk, as the fire for cooking supper was
-blazing briskly, Joe returned from a foraging expedition,
-quite out of breath, and with his milk-pail
-half empty. He said that he had met three tramps
-on the road, which passed through the grove not
-very far from the camp, and that they had snatched
-a pie from him that he had bought at a farm-house,
-and had chased him for some distance.</p>
-
-<p>He had been badly frightened, as he frankly admitted;
-but the other boys thought that it was a good
-joke on him. They told him that the tramps would
-track him by the milk that he had spilt, and would
-probably attack the camp and scalp him. They
-soon forgot the adventure, however, with the exception
-of Tom; who, although he said nothing at the
-time, poured water on the fire as soon as the supper
-was cooked—an act which somewhat astonished the
-rest. Soon afterward he went into the tent for a
-few moments, and when he returned he was beginning<span class="pagenum" id="Page_102">[102]</span>
-to advise Joe not to laugh quite so loud, when
-the crackling of branches was heard in the grove,
-and three very unpleasant-looking men appeared.</p>
-
-<p>It was fast growing dark, but Joe immediately
-recognized them as the tramps who had stolen his
-pie. “We’ve come to supper,” said one of them.
-“Let’s see what you’ve got. Give us the bill of
-fare, sonny, and look sharp about it.”</p>
-
-<p>Tom immediately answered that they had eaten
-their supper, and that there was nothing left of it
-but some coffee. “If you want the coffee, take it,”
-said he. “There isn’t anything else for you.”</p>
-
-<p>“That ain’t a perlite way to treat three gen’lemen
-as come a long ways to call on you,” said the tramp.
-“We’ll just have to help ourselves, and we’ll begin
-by looking into your tent. P’raps you’ve got a
-crust of bread there, what’ll save a poor starvin’
-workin’-man from dyin’ on the spot!”</p>
-
-<p>Tom hastily stepped before the tent. “You can’t
-go into this tent,” he said, very quietly; “and you’d
-better leave this camp and go about your business.”</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_103">[103]</span>“Just hear him,” said the tramp, addressing his
-companions. “As if this yere identical camp wasn’t
-our business. Now, boys,” he continued, “you’ve
-got money with you, and you’ve got clothes, and one
-on you’s got a watch, and you’re goin’ to give ’em to
-three honest hard-workin’ men, or else you’re goin’ to
-have your nice little throats cut.”</p>
-
-<p>“Here, boys, quick!” cried Tom, rushing into the
-tent, where he was followed by the other boys before
-the tramps could stop them. “Here, Harry,” he continued,
-“take the boat-hook. There’s a hatchet for
-you, Jim, and a stick for Joe. Now we’ll see if they
-can rob us!” So saying, he stepped outside the tent
-with the gun in his hand, followed closely by his little
-army.</p>
-
-<p>The ruffians hesitated when they saw the cool
-way in which Tom confronted them. So they proposed
-a compromise, as they called it. “Look a
-here,” said the one who had hitherto been the
-spokesman; “we ain’t unreasonable, and we’ll compromise
-this yere business. You give us your money<span class="pagenum" id="Page_104">[104]</span>
-and that chap’s watch, and we’ll let you alone.
-That’s what I call a very handsome offer.”</p>
-
-<p>“We won’t give you a thing,” replied Tom; “and
-I’ll shoot the first one of you that lays a hand on us.”</p>
-
-<p>The tramps consulted for a moment, and then the
-leader, with a frightful oath, ordered Tom to drop
-that gun instantly.</p>
-
-<p>Tom never said a word, but he cocked both barrels
-and waited, with his eye fixed on the enemy.</p>
-
-<p>Presently the tramps separated a little, the leader
-remaining where he had been standing, and the others
-moving one to the right and the other to the
-left of the boys. They evidently intended to rush
-on Tom from three directions at once, and so confuse
-him and prevent him from shooting.</p>
-
-<p>“I’ll take the leader and the man on the right,”
-whispered Tom to Harry. “You lay for the other
-fellow with your boat-hook. I’ve given you fair
-warning,” he continued, addressing the ruffians, “and
-I’ll fire the minute you try to attack us.”</p>
-
-<div class="figcenter" id="104a"><img src="images/i_104a.jpg" alt="THE FIGHT WITH THE TRAMPS" /></div>
-<p class="caption">THE FIGHT WITH THE TRAMPS.</p>
-
-<p>The boys were standing close together in front of<span class="pagenum" id="Page_105">[105]</span>
-the tent, Tom being a little in advance of the others.
-Suddenly the leader of the tramps called out, “Now
-then!” and all three made a rush toward Tom. He
-fired at the tramp in front of him, hitting him in the
-leg and bringing him to the ground; but before he
-could fire again, the other two were upon him.</p>
-
-<p>The boys gallantly stood by Tom. Harry attacked
-one of the tramps with the boat-hook so fiercely
-that the fellow cried out that he was stabbed, and
-ran away. Meanwhile Tom was struggling with the
-third tramp, who had thrown him down, and was
-trying to wrench the gun from him, while Jim and
-Joe were hovering around them afraid to strike at
-the tramp for fear of hitting Tom. But now Harry,
-having driven off his antagonist, flew to the help of
-Tom, and seizing the tramp by his hair, and bracing
-one knee against his back, dragged him backward to
-the ground, and held him there until Tom regained
-his feet, and, holding the muzzle of the gun at the
-robber’s head, called on him to surrender, which the
-fellow gladly did.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_106">[106]</span>“Get some rope, Jim, and tie him!” cried Tom.
-“Hold on to his hair, Harry, and I’ll blow his brains
-out if he offers to move.”</p>
-
-<p>The tramp was not at all anxious to part with his
-brains, and he remained perfectly quiet while Jim
-and Joe tied his feet together, and his hands behind
-his back.</p>
-
-<p>“Now you stand over him with the boat-hook,
-Harry,” said Tom, “and I’ll see to the other fellow.”</p>
-
-<p>The other fellow was, of course, the man who had
-been shot. Tom lighted the lantern, for it was now
-quite dark, and found that the ruffian had been shot
-in the lower part of his right leg, and had fainted
-from loss of blood. Taking a towel, Tom tore it
-into strips, and bound up the wound, and by the
-time he had finished the patient became conscious
-again, and begged Tom not to take him to prison.</p>
-
-<p>Now this was precisely what the boys did not
-want to do, as it would probably delay them for
-several days, and perhaps put an end to their cruise.
-Tom therefore said to the prisoner, whom Harry was<span class="pagenum" id="Page_107">[107]</span>
-guarding, that if he would promise to help the
-wounded man away, and take him to see a doctor,
-he would be released. The tramp gladly accepted
-the offer, and Harry unfastened the rope from his
-legs and arms, while Tom kept his gun in readiness
-to use it at the first sign of treachery. The tramps,
-however, had quite enough of fighting, and were
-only too anxious to get away. The wounded man
-was helped to his feet by his companion, and the
-two went slowly off, one half carrying the other, and
-both cursing the coward who had run away. As
-they hobbled off, Tom called out, “I’m sorry I had to
-hurt you, but I couldn’t help it, you know; and if
-any of you come back here to-night, you’ll find us
-ready for you.”</p>
-
-<p>It was a long time before the boys fell asleep that
-night, and Tom was overwhelmed with praise for his
-coolness and bravery. Though he felt certain that
-the tramps would not return, he proposed that a
-sentinel should keep guard outside the tent, offering
-to share that duty with Harry, since the other boys<span class="pagenum" id="Page_108">[108]</span>
-were not familiar with guns. So all night long Tom
-and Harry, relieving one another every two hours,
-marched up and down in front of the tent, keeping a
-sharp watch for robbers, and preparing for a desperate
-fight every time they heard the slightest noise.</p>
-<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" />
-
-<div class="chapter">
-<span class="pagenum" id="Page_109">[109]</span>
-
-<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER XII.</h2>
-</div>
-
-<div>
- <img class="drop-cap" src="images/i_007.jpg" width="75" height="72" alt="T" />
-</div>
-
-<p class="drop-cap">THOUGH no tramps appeared during the
-night, the sentinels proved to be useful; for
-as soon as the day began to dawn, Harry,
-who was on sentry duty, called his comrades, and
-thus they were enabled to get breakfast early, and
-to start before six o’clock. They had to wait half
-an hour for the first lock to be opened, but after that
-they had no difficulty in passing through the other
-locks. They rowed steadily, taking turns at the
-oars, and occasionally fastening the boat to the stern
-of a canal-boat, which would tow them while they
-took a short rest. Early in the afternoon they reached
-Fort Edward, where they disembarked; and
-Harry and Tom went in search of a team, which
-they hired to carry them to Warrensburg, on the
-Schroon branch of the Hudson.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_110">[110]</span>When the teamster drove down to the bank of
-the canal, Tom and the Sharpe boys began to unload
-the boat. Harry stopped them. “There isn’t any
-use in taking the things out of the boat,” said he.
-“We can draw her out of the canal and put her on
-the wagon just as she is.”</p>
-
-<p>“Her stern will dip under when we haul her bow
-out,” said Tom.</p>
-
-<p>“No it won’t,” replied Harry.</p>
-
-<p>“Let’s take the things out of the stern-sheets, anyhow,”
-urged Tom. “All our shoes are there, and
-we can’t afford to lose them.”</p>
-
-<p>“Nothing will happen to them,” answered Harry,
-confidently. “It’s my boat, and I’m going to haul
-her out with the things in her.”</p>
-
-<p>Tom said no more, but took hold of the bow of
-the boat with the others, and they began to pull her
-out of the water. As Tom had prophesied, when
-she was about half-way out her stern dipped under,
-the water poured in, and nearly everything in the
-after-part of the boat floated out. The harm was<span class="pagenum" id="Page_111">[111]</span>
-done now, so the boys hastily dragged the boat up
-the bank, and then began to lament their losses.</p>
-
-<p>There was not a shoe left, except the shoes that
-Harry and Tom had put on when they went in
-search of the team. The mast and sail and two oars
-were floating on the water, and a quantity of small
-articles, including the tin frying-pans and a tin pail,
-had shared the fate of the shoes, and were lying at
-the bottom of the canal.</p>
-
-<p>“It was my fault,” said Harry; “and I beg everybody’s
-pardon. I’ll strip and duck for the things
-till I find them.” So saying, he threw off his clothes
-and sprang into the canal. Joe, who was, next to
-Harry, the best swimmer of the party, followed his
-example; and a number of the villagers and “canalers”
-collected on the tow-path to watch the divers.</p>
-
-<p>The canal was not more than eight feet deep, but
-the bottom was very muddy, and the boys had to
-feel about in the mud with their feet for the lost articles.
-They were very fortunate, and before long
-succeeded in recovering all the shoes, except one of<span class="pagenum" id="Page_112">[112]</span>
-Joe’s, and several other things. Meanwhile three
-women and half a dozen girls, all of whom lived on
-board the fleet of canal-boats that were lying near
-by, joined the spectators, and seemed to think that
-the whole business was a capital joke. Harry and
-Joe were now anxious to come out of the water; but
-they could not come ashore while the women and
-girls were there, so they swam some distance up the
-canal, and crept out behind a barn.</p>
-
-<p>Meanwhile Tom and Jim were busily bailing out
-the boat, and arranging the wet things so that the
-sun could dry them. They were so busy that they
-forgot all about Harry and Joe. Presently Tom
-said, “Hark! I think I hear somebody calling.”</p>
-
-<p>They listened, and presently they heard a voice in
-the distance calling, “Tom! Jim! boys! somebody!
-Bring us our clothes!”</p>
-
-<p>“It’s Harry and Joe,” exclaimed Tom. “Where
-on earth are they?”</p>
-
-<div class="figcenter" id="112a"><img src="images/i_112a.jpg" alt="HARRY AND JOE IN A TRAP" /></div>
-<p class="caption">HARRY AND JOE IN A TRAP.</p>
-
-<p>They looked up the canal, and finally discovered a
-naked arm waving frantically from behind a barn<span class="pagenum" id="Page_113">[113]</span>
-that stood near the water. “They must be behind
-that barn,” said Tom. “Why, the mosquitoes will
-eat ’em alive! I’ll take their clothes to them right
-away.” So saying, Tom gathered up the shirts, trousers,
-and hats of the two unhappy divers, and ran
-with them to their owners. He found Harry and
-Joe crouched behind the barn, chattering with cold
-and surrounded by clouds of eager mosquitoes.
-“We’ve been here half an hour,” cried Joe, “and
-the mosquitoes would have finished us in another
-half-hour. I think my right leg is nearly gone already.”</p>
-
-<p>“And I know I must have lost a gallon of blood,”
-said Harry.</p>
-
-<p>“But why on earth did you come here?” asked
-Tom.</p>
-
-<p>“Because the canal is just lined with women and
-girls,” replied Joe. “They think it’s a circus; but
-I’m not going to do circus-acting without tights.”</p>
-
-<p>The boys hurriedly dressed themselves, and returning
-to the boat helped to put it on the wagon;<span class="pagenum" id="Page_114">[114]</span>
-and with the wet shoes hanging from the cart-rungs
-they started on their ride to Warrensburg. It was
-a hot and tedious ride, and as the wagon had no
-springs, the boys were bumped so terribly that they
-ached all over. They tried to sing, but the words
-were bumped out of them in the most startling way;
-and after singing one verse of the Star-spangled Banner
-in this fashion,</p>
-
-<p class="center">“The St-t-tar-spangl-led-led ba-a-an-na-na—”</p>
-
-<p>they gave it up.</p>
-
-<p>About four o’clock they reached Warrensburg,
-and after getting some dry sugar to replace that
-which had been mixed with canal water, they
-launched the boat, and rowed up the river. They
-found it a narrow stream, with a rapid current and a
-good depth of water. After their tiresome ride the
-smooth motion of the boat seemed delightful, and
-they were really sorry when they found it was so
-late that they must camp for the night.</p>
-
-<p>They chose a pleasant sandy spot between the<span class="pagenum" id="Page_115">[115]</span>
-river and the edge of a thick wood. The opposite
-bank was also thickly wooded, and they felt as if
-they were in the depths of a wilderness; though, in
-reality, there were houses quite near at hand. They
-pitched their tent, made a good supper—of which
-they were in need, for they had eaten very little at
-noon—and then “turned in.”</p>
-
-<p>For some reason—perhaps because the mosquitoes
-had so cruelly maltreated him—Joe was not sleepy;
-and after having lain awake a long time while the
-other boys were sleeping soundly, he began to feel
-lonesome. He heard a great many mysterious noises,
-as any one who lies awake in a tent always does.
-The melancholy call of the loon sounded ghostly,
-and the sighing of the wind in the trees seemed to
-him like the breathing of huge animals. After
-awhile he found himself getting nervous as well as
-lonesome, and imagined that he saw shadows of
-strange objects passing in front of the tent. By-and-by
-he distinctly heard the twigs and branches crackling,
-as somebody or something moved through the<span class="pagenum" id="Page_116">[116]</span>
-woods. The noise came nearer, and suddenly it
-flashed upon Joe that a bear was approaching the
-tent. He crept carefully to the opening of the tent,
-and putting his head out, saw indistinctly a large
-animal moving slowly in the shadow of the bushes
-only three or four rods from the tent.</p>
-
-<p>Joe lost no time in waking up the other boys, cautioning
-them as he did so not to make the least noise.
-“There’s a bear close by the tent,” he whispered.
-“I’ve been listening to him for a long while, and just
-now I saw him.”</p>
-
-<p>Harry immediately grasped the gun, both barrels
-of which he had loaded before going to sleep. Tom
-wished that he had the hatchet, but as it had been
-left in the boat, he had no weapon but his penknife.
-Thus armed, the two crept stealthily out of the tent
-to fight the bear, leaving Joe and Jim in a very unhappy
-state of mind, with nothing to defend themselves
-against the bear, in case he should attack the
-tent, except a tooth-brush and a lantern.</p>
-
-<p>The outline of the animal could be seen, but Tom<span class="pagenum" id="Page_117">[117]</span>
-and Harry could not make out which end of it was
-its head. “You must shoot him just behind the
-shoulder,” whispered Tom. “That’s the only spot
-where you can kill a bear.” Harry said nothing, but
-watched carefully to see the animal move. Presently
-it threw up either its head or tail—the boys could
-not tell which—and started toward the tent. Harry
-forgot all about shooting at the shoulder, but in
-his excitement fired at the animal generally, without
-picking out any particular spot in which to plant
-his shot.</p>
-
-<p>The effect of the shot was surprising. The bear
-set up a tremendous bellow, and by the flash of the
-gun the boys saw their dreaded enemy galloping
-away, with its horns and tail in the air. Tom burst
-into a loud laugh. “Come out, Joe,” he cried.
-“Your bear’s gone home to be milked—that is, if
-Harry hasn’t mortally wounded her.”</p>
-
-<p>Fortunately, Harry had made a miss; and he
-found his whole charge of shot the next morning
-in the trunk of a big white birch-tree. The innocent<span class="pagenum" id="Page_118">[118]</span>
-cow that Joe had mistaken for a bear was, however,
-so thoroughly frightened that she did not come near
-the camp again.</p>
-
-<p>“I stick to it that it was a bear!” said Joe, as the
-boys were wrapping themselves in their blankets.
-“Cows go to roost at sunset. Suppose it did bellow:
-how do you know that bears don’t bellow when they
-are shot?”</p>
-
-<p>“How about the horns, Joe?” asked Tom.</p>
-
-<p>“There’s horned owls—why shouldn’t there be
-horned bears? Anyway, I believe it was a bear,
-and I shall stick to it.” And to this day Joe believes—or
-thinks he does—that he had a very narrow
-escape from a ferocious bear on the banks of
-the Schroon.</p>
-<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" />
-
-<div class="chapter">
-<span class="pagenum" id="Page_119">[119]</span>
-
-<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER XIII.</h2>
-</div>
-
-<div>
- <img class="drop-cap" src="images/i_007.jpg" width="75" height="72" alt="T" />
-</div>
-
-<p class="drop-cap">THE cruise up the Schroon was a delightful
-one while it lasted. The river was so narrow
-that the trees on either side frequently
-met, forming a green and shady arch. Although
-there was a road not far from the river, and there
-were houses and small villages at a little distance
-from its banks, the boys while in their boat saw
-nothing but the water, the trees, and the sky, and
-felt as far removed from civilization as if they were
-sailing on an African river. They saw nothing to
-shoot, after their adventure with Joe’s bear, and
-there were no signs of fish in the water; but they
-delighted in the wild and solitary river, and were
-very much disappointed when, at the close of the
-day, they reached a dam so high that it seemed
-hopeless to try to carry the boat around it.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_120">[120]</span>Before camping they walked some distance above
-the dam, and found that the river was completely
-blocked up with logs, which had been cut in the forest
-above and floated down to the saw-mill. The
-men at the mill said that the boys would find the
-river choked with logs for a distance of nearly three
-miles, and that a little farther up it became a mere
-brook, too shallow and rapid to be navigated with
-the <i>Whitewing</i>.</p>
-
-<p>It was clear that the cruise on the Schroon had
-come to an end, and that it would be necessary to
-hire a wagon to take the boat to the lake. Having
-reached this decision, the boys made their camp;
-and being very tired, put off engaging a team until
-morning.</p>
-
-<p>When morning came, one of the men at the mill
-came to see them while they were at breakfast, and
-advised them not to go to Schroon Lake. He said
-that the lake was full of houses—by which he meant
-that there were a great many houses along its banks—and
-that if they were to go there they would find<span class="pagenum" id="Page_121">[121]</span>
-neither shooting nor fishing. He urged them to go
-to another lake which they had never heard of
-before—Brandt Lake. It was no farther off than
-Schroon Lake, and was full of fish. Besides, it was
-a wild mountain lake, with only two or three houses
-near it. The boys thanked him, and gladly accepted
-his advice. They had supposed that Schroon
-Lake was in the wilderness, and were exceedingly
-glad to find out their mistake in time to select a
-more attractive place. The owner of the saw-mill
-furnished them with a wagon, and soon after breakfast
-they started for Brandt Lake.</p>
-
-<p>When, after a pleasant ride, they came in sight of
-the lake, they were overjoyed to find how wild and
-beautiful it was. Steep and thickly wooded hills
-surrounded it, except at the extreme southern point,
-where they launched their boat. It was not more
-than two miles wide at the widest part, and was
-about five miles in length, and they could see but
-two houses—one on the east, and the other on the
-west shore. They eagerly hoisted the sail, and<span class="pagenum" id="Page_122">[122]</span>
-started up the lake to search for a permanent camping-ground;
-and, after spending the afternoon in examining
-almost the entire line of shore, they selected
-a little rocky island in the upper part of the lake,
-which seemed made for their purpose.</p>
-
-<p>There was a great deal of work to be done, for
-they intended to stay at Brandt Lake for a fortnight.
-They had to clear away the underbrush, and cut
-down several small trees to make room for the tent.
-Then a small landing-place had to be built of stones
-and logs, so that the boat could approach the island
-without striking on the sharp rocks which surrounded
-it. Then the stores were all to be taken out of the
-boat, and placed where they would be dry and easy
-of access. The provisions had by this time become
-nearly exhausted; but the boys had been told that
-they could get milk, eggs, butter, bread, and vegetables
-at one of the houses which was not more than
-a mile from the camp, so they were not troubled to
-find that of their canned provisions nothing was left
-except a can of peaches.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_123">[123]</span>Of course all this work was not done in one day.
-On the afternoon of their arrival at the lake the
-boys merely pitched the tent, and then went fishing
-with a view to supper. Fishing with drop-lines
-from a large rock at one end of their little island,
-they caught perch as fast as they could pull them in,
-good-sized pickerel, and two or three cat-fish. That
-night they ate a supper that would have made a
-boarding-house keeper weep tears of despair, and went
-to bed rather happier than they had ever felt before.</p>
-
-<p>Tom was to row over to the house for milk and
-other provisions in the morning; but when morning
-came the boat was gone. She had broken loose during
-the night, not having been properly fastened, and
-had floated quietly away. A faint speck was visible
-on the surface of the lake about two miles away,
-which Harry, who had remarkably good eyes, said
-was the <i>Whitewing</i>. Whether he was right or wrong,
-it was quite certain that the boys were imprisoned
-on the island, with nothing to eat but a can of peaches
-and some coffee and sugar.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_124">[124]</span>The fish, however, were waiting to be caught, and
-before very long a breakfast of fish and of coffee
-without milk was ready. The boys then began to
-discuss the important question of how they were to
-get back their boat, or to get away from the island.</p>
-
-<p>It was a mile to the shore, and nobody felt able to
-swim that distance. Joe proposed that they fasten
-one of their shirts to a tall tree, as a signal of distress,
-and then fire the gun every minute. The objection
-to this plan was that the nearest house was
-out of sight behind a little point of land, and that
-no one would see the signal, or would understand
-why the gun was fired. Then Tom proposed to
-build a raft, on which two boys could paddle after
-the runaway boat. This was a practicable suggestion,
-and it was at once put into execution.</p>
-
-<div class="figcenter" id="124a"><img src="images/i_124a.jpg" alt="HARRY SETS OUT IN PURSUIT OF THE BOAT" /></div>
-<p class="caption">HARRY SETS OUT IN PURSUIT OF THE BOAT.</p>
-
-<p>It was hard work to cut down timber enough to
-build a raft, but by perseverance the raft was finished
-before noon. It consisted of four logs laid side
-by side, and bound together with handkerchiefs, shoe-strings,
-green twigs, and a few strips from one of<span class="pagenum" id="Page_125">[125]</span>
-Harry’s shirts, which he said was unnecessarily long.
-It was covered with two or three pieces of flat driftwood;
-and when it was finished a piece of board
-was found which was shaped with the hatchet into
-a rude paddle. Then Tom and Harry proceeded to
-embark.</p>
-
-<p>The raft floated Harry very well, but promptly
-sank when Tom also stepped on it. Either more
-timber must be added to it, or one boy must go
-alone in search of the boat. Harry insisted upon going
-at once, and as the lake was perfectly smooth,
-and he could swim well, there did not seem to be
-great risk in his making the voyage alone. Bidding
-the boys good-bye, he paddled slowly away, and
-left his comrades to anxiously wait for his return.</p>
-
-<p>It was ticklish work paddling the raft. The logs
-were fastened together so insecurely, owing to the
-fact that all the rope was in the runaway boat, that
-Harry was in constant fear that they would come
-apart, and was obliged to paddle very carefully to
-avoid putting any strain on the raft. With such a<span class="pagenum" id="Page_126">[126]</span>
-craft speed was out of the question; and after an
-hour of hard work the raft was only half-way between
-the island and the boat. Harry was not easily
-discouraged, however, and he paddled on, knowing
-that if nothing happened he must reach the boat
-in course of time.</p>
-
-<p>Something did happen. When, after paddling
-for more than two hours, the <i>Whitewing</i> was rather
-less than a quarter of a mile from the raft, Harry
-missed a stroke with his paddle, and tumbled over.
-He struck the raft with his shoulder, and went
-through it as easily as if it had been fastened together
-with paper. When he came to the surface
-again he found that the raft had separated into its
-original logs, and that his voyage on it was ended.
-Luckily the <i>Whitewing</i> was now within swimming distance,
-so he struck out for her, and finally crept into
-her over the stern, so much exhausted that he had
-to lie down and rest before taking to the oars. Had
-the raft gone to pieces half an hour sooner he would
-have been in a dangerous position; for it is doubtful<span class="pagenum" id="Page_127">[127]</span>
-if he could have clung to one of the logs long enough
-to drift to the shore without becoming totally exhausted.</p>
-
-<p>The boys on the island did not witness the end
-of Harry’s raft, for it was too far away when the accident
-occurred for them to see anything but a little
-black dot on the water. They became, however,
-very anxious about him as the hours went by and
-he did not come back. Tom was especially uneasy,
-and blamed himself for permitting Harry to go
-alone. He thought of making another raft and going
-in search of Harry; but there were no more
-strings with which to fasten logs together, and he
-did not quite like to tear up his clothes and use
-them for that purpose. He did, however, resolve
-that, if Harry did not come in sight within another
-hour, he would take a small log and, putting it under
-his arms, try to swim to the main-land and borrow
-a boat, if one could be found, in which to search for
-his comrade. He was spared this hazardous experiment;
-for toward the end of the afternoon Harry and<span class="pagenum" id="Page_128">[128]</span>
-the <i>Whitewing</i> came in sight, and were welcomed
-with a tremendous cheer.</p>
-
-<p>Tom took the boat and went for provisions, and
-when he returned the <i>Whitewing</i> was not only dragged
-on shore, but fastened to two different trees with
-two distinct ropes. The boys were determined that
-she should not escape again; and when Joe proposed
-that somebody should sit up with her all night, so
-that she could not cut the ropes and run away, Tom
-seriously considered the proposal. The next day a
-snug little dock was built, in which she seemed quite
-contented, and from which she could not escape without
-climbing over a stone breakwater—a feat of
-which there was no reason to believe that she was
-capable.</p>
-<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" />
-
-<div class="chapter">
-<span class="pagenum" id="Page_129">[129]</span>
-
-<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER XIV.</h2>
-</div>
-
-<div>
- <img class="drop-cap" src="images/i_007.jpg" width="75" height="72" alt="T" />
-</div>
-
-<p class="drop-cap">THE boys had been on their island for more
-than a week when they resolved to make an
-excursion to Schroon, which was the nearest
-village, in order to get some sugar, coffee, and other
-necessaries. Schroon Lake, or rather the lower end
-of it, was not more than five miles from Brandt
-Lake; but there was a range of high hills between
-the two, and the village of Schroon was situated at
-the head of the lake, which was nearly ten miles in
-length. A long and tiresome journey was, therefore,
-before them, and they ought to have started early in
-the morning; but they did not start until nearly
-eleven o’clock. Harry, Tom, and Joe were to go
-to Schroon together, and Jim was to stay at the
-island until six o’clock, when he was to row over<span class="pagenum" id="Page_130">[130]</span>
-to the west shore and bring the others back to the
-camp.</p>
-
-<div class="figcenter" id="130a"><img src="images/i_130a.jpg" alt="BIDDING JIM GOOD-BYE" /></div>
-<p class="caption">BIDDING JIM GOOD-BYE.</p>
-
-<p>When they bade good-bye to Jim, the three other
-boys assured him that they would certainly be
-back as early as six o’clock, and warned him not
-to fail to meet them with the boat. They then
-started to cross the hills, following a foot-path, that
-was so little used that it was hardly visible. Unfortunately
-the path led through a thicket of raspberry
-bushes, and the fruit was so tempting that the
-boys lost a good deal of time by stopping to gather
-it. After a tiresome tramp under the mid-day sun
-they reached the lower end of Schroon Lake, where
-they hired a crank little row-boat, and rowed up to
-Schroon. There was a fresh northerly breeze which
-delayed them; and the spray from the bow of the
-boat sprinkled them, so that they were uncomfortably
-wet when they reached the village. By this
-time they were very hungry as well as tired, and so
-they went to the hotel for dinner. It was half-past
-six o’clock when they started to row down the lake,
-<span class="pagenum" id="Page_131">[131]</span>and several men who saw them warned them that
-they were running a good deal of risk in attempting
-to return at so late an hour.</p>
-
-<p>The trip down the lake was certainly a rather
-foolhardy one; for there was a good deal of wind
-and sea, and long before they reached the landing-place
-it was quite dark. But the boys were anxious
-to get back to their camp, and for the first time during
-the cruise they acted somewhat recklessly. However,
-they met with no accident; and when they had
-returned the boat to its owner, they set out to cross
-the hills.</p>
-
-<p>The path was not easy to find in the daylight,
-and it was next to impossible to find it in the night.
-A dozen times the boys lost themselves, and were
-compelled to depend entirely upon the stars to direct
-their course. The woods had been all cleared away
-for a space of a mile or a mile and a half wide between
-the two lakes, except just along the shore of
-Brandt Lake; so that it was not absolutely necessary
-for them to keep in the path, as it would have been<span class="pagenum" id="Page_132">[132]</span>
-had they been passing through a thick forest. Still
-it was not pleasant to lose the path, and stumble
-over stones and stumps, and of course it made the
-journey longer. They must have walked at least
-seven or eight miles on their way back before they
-finally reached their own lake at midnight, at the
-point where they expected to find Jim waiting for
-them.</p>
-
-<p>Neither Jim nor the boat was there. He had
-waited until ten o’clock, and then, making up his
-mind that they had decided to spend the night at
-Schroon, he rowed back to the island, and went
-calmly to bed. An hour later a dense fog settled over
-the lake; and when the tired boys reached the shore
-they could see but a few yards in front of their eyes.</p>
-
-<p>It was a terrible disappointment, but Harry tried
-to be cheerful. “We shall have to stay here to-night,
-boys,” said he; “but we will build a good fire
-and keep warm.” Tom said that he thought that
-was the best thing to do, for without a fire they
-would suffer severely from the cold, wet fog, and he<span class="pagenum" id="Page_133">[133]</span>
-asked Harry if he had any matches. Harry had
-none, Joe had none, and Tom had none; so the plan
-of building a fire came to nothing.</p>
-
-<p>The cold gradually chilled them as they stood
-talking over their adventure, and their teeth began
-to chatter. Joe said he wished he could get hold of
-Jim for about five minutes, so that he could warm himself
-up by convincing him that he ought not to have
-taken the boat back to the island. Harry said nothing;
-but he was wondering whether he would freeze
-to death in the fog, and tried to remember how travellers
-overtaken by the snow on the Alps contrive to
-fight off the terrible drowsiness that steals over them
-when they are freezing. Tom was more practical.
-He did not expect to freeze in July, although he was
-miserably cold; and he did not want to punish Jim
-for a mistake of judgment. He knew that the house
-where they were accustomed to get milk was not far
-off, and that a boat usually lay on the shore near
-the house; so he proposed to Harry and Joe to borrow
-the boat and make their way into the camp.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_134">[134]</span>“If we go to that house at this time of night, we
-shall get shot,” remarked Harry. “The man is an
-ugly-tempered chap, and I heard him say the other
-day that if he ever heard anything prowling around
-the house at night, he always fired at it.”</p>
-
-<p>“Then we won’t ask him for his boat: we’ll borrow
-it without leave, and Jim can bring it back in
-the morning,” replied Tom.</p>
-
-<p>“This is nice conduct for Moral Pirates,” said Joe.
-“Capturing a vessel at night is real piracy, and when
-Jim takes the boat back the man will be sure to
-shoot him. I’m sorry for Jim; but I hope it will be
-a warning to him not to leave his friends in such a
-fix that they’ve either got to borrow a boat without
-leave, or freeze.”</p>
-
-<p>They made their way stealthily and with great
-difficulty to the place where the boat lay. It was
-high and dry on the beach, and though the fog hid
-the house where the owner of the boat lived, the
-boys knew that it was very near. They launched
-the boat with the utmost caution, lest any noise<span class="pagenum" id="Page_135">[135]</span>
-should awaken the bad-tempered man with the shotgun.
-They had it almost launched, when Harry’s
-foot slipped on a wet stone, and he fell with a dismal
-crash, clinging to the boat, and dragging Tom
-and Joe down with him.</p>
-
-<p>It was very certain that if anything could wake
-the owner of the boat, he must be awake by this
-time; so the boys sprang up, and shoving the boat
-into the water regardless of the noise, seized the oars,
-and rowed away into the fog. When they had gained
-what they thought a safe distance from the shore
-they ceased rowing, and congratulated themselves
-that they were all right at last. To be sure, Harry
-had scraped his ankle badly; Tom had forgotten the
-coffee, and left it on the shore; and Joe had put the
-sugar in the bottom of the leaky boat, where it was
-rapidly dissolving into sirup; but they were once
-more afloat, and expected to reach their comfortable
-camp within the next twenty minutes.</p>
-
-<p>There was not a particle of air stirring, and not a
-star was visible, so they had absolutely nothing to<span class="pagenum" id="Page_136">[136]</span>
-steer by. They could not even hear the sound of
-the water which ordinarily lapped the shore. Still
-they were not discouraged. Harry thought he knew
-which way the camp lay, and so he and Tom rowed
-in what they imagined was the right direction.</p>
-
-<p>They rowed for two hours without finding the
-island, and without reaching the shore. They could
-not understand it. The lake seemed to have grown
-in the night, and to have reached the size of Lake
-Ontario. They knew that by daylight they could
-row across it at its widest part in less than an hour,
-but now it seemed impossible to find any shore.
-Joe had just suggested that they had made a mistake
-in coming back from Schroon, and had walked all
-the way to Lake Champlain, on which they were
-now rowing, when the bow of the boat struck the
-shore.</p>
-
-<p>It was some consolation to know that the lake
-actually had a shore; but they could not tell what
-part of the shore they had reached. They pushed
-off again, and resumed their hopeless search for the<span class="pagenum" id="Page_137">[137]</span>
-camp. A new trouble now harassed them. From
-seeming to have no shore at all, the lake now seemed
-to have shrunk to a mere mud-puddle. No matter
-in what direction they rowed, they would strike
-the shore within ten minutes, and always at a different
-place. Joe said that he had never dreamed that
-so much shore and so little lake could be put together.</p>
-
-<p>Toward morning Harry and Tom became too tired
-to row, and they lay down in the bottom of the wet
-boat, and tried to keep warm by lying close to each
-other. Joe took the oars, and tried to row without
-hitting the shore; but he had hardly dipped his oars
-when the bow grated on the pebbles. He promptly
-gave up the attempt, and making the boat fast to a
-tree, joined Tom and Harry, and shared their misery.</p>
-
-<p>They were much too cold and wretched to sleep,
-but they managed to keep from growing positively
-stiff with cold. The sun rose, but it did not for a
-long time make any impression on the fog. All at
-once, about seven o’clock, the fog vanished; and the<span class="pagenum" id="Page_138">[138]</span>
-boys found themselves in a little bay near the extreme
-northerly part of the lake. They had been
-rowing across this little bay, first in one direction
-and then in another, during all those miserable
-hours when they found such an unaccountable quantity
-of shore.</p>
-
-<p>Of course they rowed down to the camp, where
-they found Jim still sleeping soundly, with a contented,
-happy look that was awfully exasperating. They
-woke him up, and scolded him with all the strength
-they had left, and then, putting on dry clothes, “turned
-in,” and slept all day. Jim towed the borrowed
-boat back, but was not shot; and the boys afterward
-said that, on the whole, they were rather glad that
-he still lived, and that they would mercifully forgive
-him.</p>
-<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" />
-
-<div class="chapter">
-<span class="pagenum" id="Page_139">[139]</span>
-
-<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER XV.</h2>
-</div>
-
-<div>
- <img class="drop-cap" src="images/i_007.jpg" width="75" height="72" alt="T" />
-</div>
-
-<p class="drop-cap">THERE was only one fault to be found with
-Brandt Lake; there was hardly anything to
-shoot in its vicinity. Occasionally a deer
-could be found; but at the season of the year when
-the boys were at the lake it was contrary to law to
-kill deer. It was known that there were bears in
-that part of the country as well as lynxes—or catamounts,
-as they are generally called; but they were
-so scarce that no one thought of hunting them.
-Harry did succeed in shooting three pigeons and a
-quail, and Tom shot a gray squirrel; but the bears,
-deer, catamounts, and ducks that they had expected
-to shoot did not show themselves.</p>
-
-<p>On the other hand, they had any quantity of fishing.
-Perch and cat-fish swarmed all around the island;
-and large pickerel, some of them weighing six<span class="pagenum" id="Page_140">[140]</span>
-or eight pounds, could be caught by trolling. Two
-miles farther north was another lake that was full
-of trout, and the boys visited it several times, and
-found out how delicious a trout is when it is cooked
-within half an hour after it is taken out of the water.
-In fact they lived principally upon fish, and became
-so dainty that they would not condescend to cook
-any but the choicest trout, and the plumpest cat-fish
-and pickerel.</p>
-
-<p>It must be confessed that there was a good deal
-of monotony in their daily life. In the morning
-somebody went for milk, after which breakfast was
-cooked and eaten. Then one of the boys would
-take the gun and tramp through the woods in the
-hope of finding something to shoot, while the others
-would either go fishing or lie in the shade. Once
-they devoted a whole day to circumnavigating the
-lake in the boat, and another day a long rain-storm
-kept them inside of the tent most of the time. With
-these exceptions one day was remarkably like another;
-and at the end of two weeks they began to grow<span class="pagenum" id="Page_141">[141]</span>
-a little tired of camping, and to remember that there
-were ways of enjoying themselves at home.</p>
-
-<p>Their final departure from their island camp was
-caused by an accident. They had decided to row to
-the southern end of the lake and engage a team to
-meet them the following week and to carry them to
-Glenn’s Falls, where they intended to ship the boat
-on board a canal-boat bound for New York, and to
-return home by rail. To avoid the heat of the sun,
-they started down the lake immediately after breakfast,
-and forgot to put out the fire before they left
-the island.</p>
-
-<p>After they had rowed at least a mile, Tom, who
-sat facing the stern, noticed a light wreath of
-smoke rising from the island, and remarked, “Our
-fire is burning yet. We ought not to have gone off
-and left it.”</p>
-
-<p>Harry looked back, and saw that the cloud of
-smoke was rapidly increasing.</p>
-
-<p>“It’s not the fire that’s making all that smoke!” he
-exclaimed.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_142">[142]</span>“What is it, then?” asked Tom.</p>
-
-<p>“Perhaps it’s water,” said Joe. “I always thought
-that where there was smoke there must be fire; but
-Harry says it isn’t fire.”</p>
-
-<p>“I mean,” continued Harry, “that we didn’t leave
-fire enough to make so much smoke. It must have
-spread and caught something.”</p>
-
-<p>“Caught the tent, most likely,” said Tom. “Let’s
-row back right away and put it out.”</p>
-
-<p>“What’s the use?” interrupted Jim. “That tent
-is as dry as tinder, and will burn up before we can
-get half-way there.”</p>
-
-<p>“We must get back as soon as we can,” cried Harry.
-“All our things are in the tent. Row your
-best, boys, and we may save them yet.”</p>
-
-<p>The boat was quickly turned, and headed toward
-the camp. The fire was rapidly increasing, and it
-was apparent that the dry underbrush must have
-caught; in which case the fire would soon fasten on
-the trees, and sweep over the whole of the little
-island.</p>
-
-<div class="figcenter" id="143a"><img src="images/i_142b.jpg" alt="THE EXPLOSION IN CAMP" /></div>
-<p class="caption">THE EXPLOSION IN CAMP.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_143">[143]</span>“There’s one reason why I’m not particularly anxious
-to help put that fire out,” Joe remarked, as they
-approached the island, and could see that a really
-alarming fire was in progress.</p>
-
-<p>“What’s that?” asked Harry.</p>
-
-<p>“As near as I can calculate, there must be about
-two pounds—”</p>
-
-<p>He was interrupted by a loud report from the
-island, and a shower of pebbles, sticks, and small articles—among
-which a shoe and a tin pail were recognized—shot
-into the air.</p>
-
-<p>—“Of powder,” Joe continued, “in the flask. I
-thought it would blow up, and now that it’s all gone
-I don’t mind landing on the island.”</p>
-
-<p>“Everything must be ruined!” exclaimed Jim.</p>
-
-<p>“Lucky for us that we put on our shoes this morning,”
-Tom remarked, as he rowed steadily on. “That
-must have been one of my other pair that just went
-up. I remember I put them in the corner of the
-tent close by the powder.”</p>
-
-<p>When they reached the island they could not at<span class="pagenum" id="Page_144">[144]</span>
-first land, on account of the heat of the flames; but
-they could plainly see that the tent and everything
-in it had been totally destroyed. After waiting for
-half an hour the fire burnt itself out, so that they
-could approach their dock and land on the smoking
-ash heap that an hour before had been such a beautiful,
-shady spot. There was hardly anything left
-that was of any use. A tin pan, a fork, and the
-hatchet were found uninjured; but all their clothing
-and other stores were either burnt to ashes or so
-badly scorched as to be useless. Quite overwhelmed
-by their disaster, the boys sat down and looked
-at one another.</p>
-
-<p>“We’ve got to go home now, whether we want to
-or not,” Harry said, as he poked the ashes idly with
-a stick.</p>
-
-<p>“Well, we meant to go home in a few days anyway,”
-said Tom; “so the fire hasn’t got very much
-the better of us.”</p>
-
-<p>“But I hate to have everything spoiled, and to
-have to go in this sort of way. Our tin pans and<span class="pagenum" id="Page_145">[145]</span>
-fishing-tackle aren’t worth much, but all our spare
-clothes have gone.”</p>
-
-<p>“You’ve got your uncle’s gun in the boat, so that’s
-all right,” suggested Tom, encouragingly. “As long
-as the gun and the boat are safe, we needn’t mind
-about a few flannel shirts and things.”</p>
-
-<p>“But it’s such a pity to be driven away when we
-were having such a lovely time,” continued Harry.</p>
-
-<p>“That’s rubbish, Harry,” said Joe. “We were all
-beginning to get tired of camping out. I think it’s
-jolly to have the cruise end this way, with a lot of
-fireworks. It’s like the transformation scene at the
-theatre. Besides, it saves us the trouble of carrying
-a whole lot of things back with us.”</p>
-
-<p>“The thing to do now,” remarked Tom, “is to row
-right down to the outlet, and get a team to take us
-to Glenn’s Falls this afternoon. We can’t sleep here,
-unless we build a hut, and then we wouldn’t have
-a blanket to cover us. Don’t let’s waste any more
-time talking about it.”</p>
-
-<p>“That’s so! Take your places in the boat, boys,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_146">[146]</span>
-and we’ll start for home.” So saying, Harry led the
-way to the boat, and in a few moments the <i>Whitewing</i>
-was homeward bound.</p>
-
-<p>The boys were lucky enough to find a man who
-engaged to take them to Glenn’s Falls in time to
-catch the afternoon train for Albany. They stopped
-at the Falls only long enough to see the <i>Whitewing</i>
-safely on board a canal-boat, and they reached Albany
-in time to go down the river on the night-boat.</p>
-
-<p>After a supper that filled the colored waiters with
-astonishment and horror, the boys selected arm-chairs
-on the forward deck, and began to talk over the
-cruise. They all agreed that they had had a splendid
-time, in spite of hard work and frequent wettings.</p>
-
-<p>“We’ll go on another cruise next summer, sure,”
-said Harry. “Where shall we go?”</p>
-
-<p>Tom was the first to reply. Said he, “I’ve been
-thinking that we can do better than we did this
-time.”</p>
-
-<p>“How so?” asked the other boys.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_147">[147]</span>“The <i>Whitewing</i> is an awfully nice boat,” Tom
-continued, “but she is too small. We ought to have
-a boat that we can sleep in comfortably, and without
-getting wet every night.”</p>
-
-<p>“But, then,” Harry suggested, “you couldn’t drag
-a bigger boat round a dam.”</p>
-
-<p>“We can’t drag the <i>Whitewing</i> round much of a
-dam. She’s too big to be handled on land, and too
-little to be comfortable. Now, here’s my plan.”</p>
-
-<p>“Let’s have it,” cried the other boys.</p>
-
-<p>“We can hire a cat-boat about twenty feet long,
-and she’ll be big enough, so that we can rig up a
-canvas cabin at night. We can anchor her, and
-sleep on board her every night. We can carry mattresses,
-so we needn’t sleep on stones and stumps—”</p>
-
-<p>—“And coffee-pots,” interrupted Joe.</p>
-
-<p>—“And we can take lots of things, and live comfortably.
-We can sail instead of rowing; and
-though I like to row as well as the next fellow,
-we’ve had a little too much of that. Now we’ll get
-a cat-boat next summer, and we’ll cruise from New<span class="pagenum" id="Page_148">[148]</span>
-York Bay to Montauk Point. We can go all the
-way through the bays on the south side, and there
-are only three places where we will have to get a
-team of horses to drag the boat across a little bit
-of flat meadow. I know all about it, for I studied
-it out on the map one day. What do you say for
-that for a cruise?”</p>
-
-<p>“I’ll go,” said Harry.</p>
-
-<p>“And I’ll go,” said Jim.</p>
-
-<p>“Hurrah for the cat-boat!” said Joe. “We can
-be twice as moral and piratical in a sail-boat as we
-can in a row-boat, even if it is the dear little <i>Whitewing</i>.”</p>
-
-<p class="center">THE END.</p>
-
-<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" />
-
-<div class="chapter">
-<div class="transnote">
-<p class="ph1">TRANSCRIBER’S NOTES:</p>
-
-<p>Obvious typographical errors have been corrected.</p>
-
-<p>Inconsistencies in hyphenation have been standardized.</p>
-
-<p>Archaic or variant spelling has been retained.</p>
-
-<p>The cover image for this eBook was created by the transcriber using the original cover as the background and is entered into the public domain.</p>
-</div></div>
-<div style='display:block; margin-top:4em'>*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE MORAL PIRATES ***</div>
-<div style='text-align:left'>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-Updated editions will replace the previous one&#8212;the old editions will
-be renamed.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright
-law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works,
-so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United
-States without permission and without paying copyright
-royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part
-of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project
-Gutenberg&#8482; electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG&#8482;
-concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark,
-and may not be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following
-the terms of the trademark license, including paying royalties for use
-of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for
-copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is very
-easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation
-of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project
-Gutenberg eBooks may be modified and printed and given away&#8212;you may
-do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected
-by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark
-license, especially commercial redistribution.
-</div>
-
-<div style='margin-top:1em; font-size:1.1em; text-align:center'>START: FULL LICENSE</div>
-<div style='text-align:center;font-size:0.9em'>THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE</div>
-<div style='text-align:center;font-size:0.9em'>PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-To protect the Project Gutenberg&#8482; mission of promoting the free
-distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
-(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase &#8220;Project
-Gutenberg&#8221;), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full
-Project Gutenberg&#8482; License available with this file or online at
-www.gutenberg.org/license.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'>
-Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg&#8482; electronic works
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg&#8482;
-electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
-and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
-(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all
-the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or
-destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg&#8482; electronic works in your
-possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a
-Project Gutenberg&#8482; electronic work and you do not agree to be bound
-by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person
-or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.B. &#8220;Project Gutenberg&#8221; is a registered trademark. It may only be
-used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
-agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few
-things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg&#8482; electronic works
-even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See
-paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project
-Gutenberg&#8482; electronic works if you follow the terms of this
-agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg&#8482;
-electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (&#8220;the
-Foundation&#8221; or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection
-of Project Gutenberg&#8482; electronic works. Nearly all the individual
-works in the collection are in the public domain in the United
-States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the
-United States and you are located in the United States, we do not
-claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing,
-displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as
-all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope
-that you will support the Project Gutenberg&#8482; mission of promoting
-free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg&#8482;
-works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the
-Project Gutenberg&#8482; name associated with the work. You can easily
-comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the
-same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg&#8482; License when
-you share it without charge with others.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
-what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are
-in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States,
-check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this
-agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing,
-distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any
-other Project Gutenberg&#8482; work. The Foundation makes no
-representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any
-country other than the United States.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other
-immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg&#8482; License must appear
-prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg&#8482; work (any work
-on which the phrase &#8220;Project Gutenberg&#8221; appears, or with which the
-phrase &#8220;Project Gutenberg&#8221; is associated) is accessed, displayed,
-performed, viewed, copied or distributed:
-</div>
-
-<blockquote>
- <div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
- This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most
- other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions
- whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms
- of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online
- at <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a>. If you
- are not located in the United States, you will have to check the laws
- of the country where you are located before using this eBook.
- </div>
-</blockquote>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg&#8482; electronic work is
-derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not
-contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the
-copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in
-the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are
-redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase &#8220;Project
-Gutenberg&#8221; associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply
-either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or
-obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg&#8482;
-trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg&#8482; electronic work is posted
-with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
-must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any
-additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms
-will be linked to the Project Gutenberg&#8482; License for all works
-posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the
-beginning of this work.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg&#8482;
-License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
-work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg&#8482;.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
-electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
-prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
-active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
-Gutenberg&#8482; License.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
-compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including
-any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access
-to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg&#8482; work in a format
-other than &#8220;Plain Vanilla ASCII&#8221; or other format used in the official
-version posted on the official Project Gutenberg&#8482; website
-(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense
-to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means
-of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original &#8220;Plain
-Vanilla ASCII&#8221; or other form. Any alternate format must include the
-full Project Gutenberg&#8482; License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
-performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg&#8482; works
-unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
-access to or distributing Project Gutenberg&#8482; electronic works
-provided that:
-</div>
-
-<div style='margin-left:0.7em;'>
- <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'>
- &#8226; You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
- the use of Project Gutenberg&#8482; works calculated using the method
- you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed
- to the owner of the Project Gutenberg&#8482; trademark, but he has
- agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project
- Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid
- within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are
- legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty
- payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project
- Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in
- Section 4, &#8220;Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg
- Literary Archive Foundation.&#8221;
- </div>
-
- <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'>
- &#8226; You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
- you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
- does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg&#8482;
- License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all
- copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue
- all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg&#8482;
- works.
- </div>
-
- <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'>
- &#8226; You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of
- any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
- electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of
- receipt of the work.
- </div>
-
- <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'>
- &#8226; You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
- distribution of Project Gutenberg&#8482; works.
- </div>
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project
-Gutenberg&#8482; electronic work or group of works on different terms than
-are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing
-from the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of
-the Project Gutenberg&#8482; trademark. Contact the Foundation as set
-forth in Section 3 below.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.F.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
-effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
-works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project
-Gutenberg&#8482; collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg&#8482;
-electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may
-contain &#8220;Defects,&#8221; such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate
-or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other
-intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or
-other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or
-cannot be read by your equipment.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the &#8220;Right
-of Replacement or Refund&#8221; described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
-Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
-Gutenberg&#8482; trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
-Gutenberg&#8482; electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
-liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
-fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
-LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
-PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
-TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
-LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
-INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
-DAMAGE.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
-defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
-receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
-written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
-received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium
-with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you
-with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in
-lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person
-or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second
-opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If
-the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing
-without further opportunities to fix the problem.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
-in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you &#8216;AS-IS&#8217;, WITH NO
-OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
-LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
-warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of
-damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement
-violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the
-agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or
-limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or
-unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the
-remaining provisions.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
-trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
-providing copies of Project Gutenberg&#8482; electronic works in
-accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the
-production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg&#8482;
-electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses,
-including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of
-the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this
-or any Project Gutenberg&#8482; work, (b) alteration, modification, or
-additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg&#8482; work, and (c) any
-Defect you cause.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'>
-Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg&#8482;
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-Project Gutenberg&#8482; is synonymous with the free distribution of
-electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of
-computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It
-exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations
-from people in all walks of life.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
-assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg&#8482;&#8217;s
-goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg&#8482; collection will
-remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project
-Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
-and permanent future for Project Gutenberg&#8482; and future
-generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see
-Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'>
-Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit
-501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
-state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
-Revenue Service. The Foundation&#8217;s EIN or federal tax identification
-number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by
-U.S. federal laws and your state&#8217;s laws.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-The Foundation&#8217;s business office is located at 809 North 1500 West,
-Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up
-to date contact information can be found at the Foundation&#8217;s website
-and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'>
-Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-Project Gutenberg&#8482; depends upon and cannot survive without widespread
-public support and donations to carry out its mission of
-increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
-freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest
-array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations
-($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
-status with the IRS.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
-charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
-States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
-considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
-with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations
-where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND
-DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular state
-visit <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org/donate/">www.gutenberg.org/donate</a>.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
-have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
-against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
-approach us with offers to donate.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
-any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
-outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation
-methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other
-ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To
-donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'>
-Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg&#8482; electronic works
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project
-Gutenberg&#8482; concept of a library of electronic works that could be
-freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and
-distributed Project Gutenberg&#8482; eBooks with only a loose network of
-volunteer support.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-Project Gutenberg&#8482; eBooks are often created from several printed
-editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in
-the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not
-necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper
-edition.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-Most people start at our website which has the main PG search
-facility: <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a>.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-This website includes information about Project Gutenberg&#8482;,
-including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
-subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
-</div>
-
-</div>
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/old/68732-h/images/cover.jpg b/old/68732-h/images/cover.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index 8452644..0000000
--- a/old/68732-h/images/cover.jpg
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/68732-h/images/coversmall.jpg b/old/68732-h/images/coversmall.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index 79a4ca4..0000000
--- a/old/68732-h/images/coversmall.jpg
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/68732-h/images/i_002.jpg b/old/68732-h/images/i_002.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index f3c4eff..0000000
--- a/old/68732-h/images/i_002.jpg
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/68732-h/images/i_007.jpg b/old/68732-h/images/i_007.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index 8e6d4ed..0000000
--- a/old/68732-h/images/i_007.jpg
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/68732-h/images/i_012b.jpg b/old/68732-h/images/i_012b.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index c1503fd..0000000
--- a/old/68732-h/images/i_012b.jpg
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/68732-h/images/i_017.jpg b/old/68732-h/images/i_017.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index 14e80db..0000000
--- a/old/68732-h/images/i_017.jpg
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/68732-h/images/i_026b.jpg b/old/68732-h/images/i_026b.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index e7e1f2c..0000000
--- a/old/68732-h/images/i_026b.jpg
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/68732-h/images/i_027.jpg b/old/68732-h/images/i_027.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index 807bce4..0000000
--- a/old/68732-h/images/i_027.jpg
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/68732-h/images/i_037.jpg b/old/68732-h/images/i_037.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index 1197a42..0000000
--- a/old/68732-h/images/i_037.jpg
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/68732-h/images/i_042b.jpg b/old/68732-h/images/i_042b.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index c35fe2f..0000000
--- a/old/68732-h/images/i_042b.jpg
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/68732-h/images/i_047.jpg b/old/68732-h/images/i_047.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index 21fedff..0000000
--- a/old/68732-h/images/i_047.jpg
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/68732-h/images/i_052b.jpg b/old/68732-h/images/i_052b.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index 83857d7..0000000
--- a/old/68732-h/images/i_052b.jpg
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/68732-h/images/i_058a.jpg b/old/68732-h/images/i_058a.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index 414fd17..0000000
--- a/old/68732-h/images/i_058a.jpg
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/68732-h/images/i_064a.jpg b/old/68732-h/images/i_064a.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index 52ed19b..0000000
--- a/old/68732-h/images/i_064a.jpg
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/68732-h/images/i_072a.jpg b/old/68732-h/images/i_072a.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index 711dcb3..0000000
--- a/old/68732-h/images/i_072a.jpg
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/68732-h/images/i_080b.jpg b/old/68732-h/images/i_080b.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index 3f6f433..0000000
--- a/old/68732-h/images/i_080b.jpg
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/68732-h/images/i_092b.jpg b/old/68732-h/images/i_092b.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index 06722d7..0000000
--- a/old/68732-h/images/i_092b.jpg
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/68732-h/images/i_099.jpg b/old/68732-h/images/i_099.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index 11efd2c..0000000
--- a/old/68732-h/images/i_099.jpg
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/68732-h/images/i_104a.jpg b/old/68732-h/images/i_104a.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index b31e32a..0000000
--- a/old/68732-h/images/i_104a.jpg
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/68732-h/images/i_112a.jpg b/old/68732-h/images/i_112a.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index 6d8a417..0000000
--- a/old/68732-h/images/i_112a.jpg
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/68732-h/images/i_124a.jpg b/old/68732-h/images/i_124a.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index 4bff877..0000000
--- a/old/68732-h/images/i_124a.jpg
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/68732-h/images/i_130a.jpg b/old/68732-h/images/i_130a.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index a58b6de..0000000
--- a/old/68732-h/images/i_130a.jpg
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/68732-h/images/i_142b.jpg b/old/68732-h/images/i_142b.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index 2410e2d..0000000
--- a/old/68732-h/images/i_142b.jpg
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/68732-h/images/i_titlepage.jpg b/old/68732-h/images/i_titlepage.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index e269483..0000000
--- a/old/68732-h/images/i_titlepage.jpg
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ